advertisement
ES-3124 Series
Intelligent Layer 2+ Switch
User’s Guide
Version 3.70
Edition 2
4/2007
Copyright
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Copyright
Copyright © 2007 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL
Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
3
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.
FCC Warning
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CE Mark Warning:
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Taiwanese BSMI (Bureau of Standards, Metrology and Inspection) A
Warning:
4
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1
Certifications
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040.10 AND 1040.11.
PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040.10 ET 1040.11.
Viewing Certifications
1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com
.
2 Select your product from the drop-down list box on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page.
3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page.
Certifications 5
6
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Safety Warnings
For your safety, be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions.
• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.
• Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in
North America or 230V AC in Europe).
• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.
• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the power outlet.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY (on the motherboard) IS REPLACED
BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO
THE INSTRUCTIONS. Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment. For detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product.
• Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
• The PoE (Power over Ethernet) devices that supply or receive power and their connected
Ethernet cables must all be completely indoors.
Safety Warnings
This product is recyclable. Dispose of it properly.
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Safety Warnings 7
8
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return
Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of
ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
DENMARK
FINLAND
FRANCE
GERMANY
HUNGARY
KAZAKHSTAN
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Customer Support
Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support.
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
LOCATION
METHOD SUPPORT E-MAIL TELEPHONE
SALES E-MAIL FAX [email protected] +886-3-578-3942
CORPORATE
HEADQUARTERS
(WORLDWIDE) [email protected]
+886-3-578-2439
COSTA RICA [email protected]
+506-2017878
+506-2015098
CZECH REPUBLIC [email protected]
+420-241-091-350
+420-241-091-359 [email protected] +45-39-55-07-00 [email protected] +45-39-55-07-07 [email protected]
+358-9-4780-8411
+358-9-4780 8448 [email protected] +33-4-72-52-97-97
+33-4-72-52-19-20 [email protected]
+49-2405-6909-0
+49-2405-6909-99
+36-1-3361649
+36-1-3259100 http://zyxel.kz/support +7-3272-590-698 [email protected]
+7-3272-590-689 [email protected]
NORTH AMERICA [email protected]
1-800-255-4101
+1-714-632-0882
+1-714-632-0858
WEB SITE
REGULAR MAIL
FTP SITE www.zyxel.com
www.europe.zyxel.com
ftp.zyxel.com
ftp.europe.zyxel.com
ZyXEL Communications Corp.
6 Innovation Road II
Science Park
Hsinchu 300
Taiwan www.zyxel.co.cr
ftp.zyxel.co.cr
www.zyxel.cz
ZyXEL Costa Rica
Plaza Roble Escazú
Etapa El Patio, Tercer Piso
San José, Costa Rica
ZyXEL Communications
Czech s.r.o.
Modranská 621
143 01 Praha 4 - Modrany
Ceská Republika
Communications A/S
Columbusvej
2860 Soeborg
Denmark www.zyxel.fi ZyXEL Communications Oy
Malminkaari 10
00700 Helsinki
Finland
France
1 rue des Vergers
Bat. 1 / C
69760 Limonest
France www.zyxel.de
ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH.
Adenauerstr. 20/A2 D-52146
Wuerselen
Germany www.zyxel.hu
www.zyxel.kz
ZyXEL Hungary
48, Zoldlomb Str.
H-1025, Budapest
Hungary
ZyXEL Kazakhstan
43, Dostyk ave.,Office 414
Dostyk Business Centre
050010, Almaty
Republic of Kazakhstan www.us.zyxel.com
ftp.us.zyxel.com
ZyXEL Communications Inc.
1130 N. Miller St.
Anaheim
CA 92806-2001
U.S.A.
Customer Support 9
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
LOCATION
NORWAY
POLAND
RUSSIA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
UKRAINE
METHOD SUPPORT E-MAIL
UNITED KINGDOM
TELEPHONE WEB SITE
REGULAR MAIL
SALES E-MAIL FAX FTP SITE [email protected] +47-22-80-61-80 [email protected] +47-22-80-61-81 [email protected]
http://zyxel.ru/support [email protected]
+48 (22) 333 8250
+48 (22) 333 8251
+7-095-542-89-29
+7-095-542-89-25 www.zyxel.no www.pl.zyxel.com
www.zyxel.ru
ZyXEL Communications A/S
Nils Hansens vei 13
0667 Oslo
Norway
ZyXEL Communications ul. Okrzei 1A
03-715 Warszawa
Poland
ZyXEL Russia
Ostrovityanova 37a Str.
Moscow, 117279
Russia [email protected]
+34-902-195-420 [email protected] +34-913-005-345 [email protected] +46-31-744-7700 [email protected] +46-31-744-7701 [email protected] +380-44-247-69-78 [email protected]
+380-44-494-49-32
+44-1344 303044
08707 555779 (UK only)
+44-1344 303034 www.zyxel.es ZyXEL Communications
Arte, 21 5ª planta
28033 Madrid
Spain www.zyxel.se
ZyXEL Communications A/S
Sjöporten 4, 41764 Göteborg
Sweden www.ua.zyxel.com
www.zyxel.co.uk
ftp.zyxel.co.uk
ZyXEL Ukraine
13, Pimonenko Str.
Kiev, 04050
Ukraine
ZyXEL Communications UK
Ltd.,11 The Courtyard,
Eastern Road, Bracknell,
Berkshire, RG12 2XB,
United Kingdom (UK)
+” is the (prefix) number you enter to make an international telephone call.
10 Customer Support
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
1.4.3 High Performance Switched Example ......................................................39
1.4.4 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Examples ...............................................40
1.4.4.1 Tag-based VLAN Example ..............................................................40
1.4.4.2 VLAN Shared Server Example ........................................................41
2.2.1 Rack-mounted Installation Requirements .................................................44
2.2.2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch ........................................44
Table of Contents 11
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
3.1.2.1 Default Ethernet Settings ................................................................50
3.1.3.1 Transceiver Installation ................................................................50
3.1.3.2 Transceiver Removal ...................................................................51
3.2.2 External Backup Power Supply Connector ...............................................52
5.2 Configuring Switch Management IP Address .....................................................67
12 Table of Contents
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
8.1 Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN ..................................................93
8.1.1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames ..............................................93
8.5.4 Configure VLAN Port Settings .............................................................100
Table of Contents 13
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
11.3 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol ....................................................118
11.4 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status .......................................................121
11.5 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol .......................................122
11.6 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status .........................................125
16.1.1.1 Vendor Specific Attribute .............................................................145
16.1.1.2 Tunnel Protocol Attribute .............................................................146
16.2.1 Configuring RADIUS Server Settings ................................................147
16.2.2 Activate IEEE 802.1x Security ...........................................................148
14 Table of Contents
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
19.1.2 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior ...............................................................161
20.1.3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) ..........................................168
Table of Contents 15
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
22.7.1 MVR Configuration Example ................................................................188
23.1.1 DHCP Relay Agent Information ............................................................191
26.8.1.1 Example FTP Commands ...........................................................204
26.8.2 FTP Command Line Procedure ...........................................................204
16 Table of Contents
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
27.3.4 Setting Up Login Accounts ................................................................210
27.8.1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages ...................................................215
27.8.2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages ...............................................215
30.2.1 Cluster Member Switch Management ..................................................229
30.2.1.1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch .....................230
Table of Contents 17
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
34.11.4 interface port-channel Commands ......................................................267
18 Table of Contents
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
36.4.4 Other Examples of no Commands ........................................................288
36.4.4.2 no port-access-authenticator .......................................................289
Table of Contents 19
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands ............................................................. 305
38.2 Global VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands .............................306
38.3.4.1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example ..........................................309
38.3.4.2 Forwarding Process Example .....................................................309
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands .......................................................... 313
40.2.1 Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions ..........................316
40.2.1.1 Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers ..............................................316
20 Table of Contents
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents 21
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
22 Table of Contents
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 3 High Performance Switched Application ................................................. 40
Figure 5 Shared Server Using VLAN Example ..................................................... 41
Figure 15 Opening the Transceiver’s Latch Example ........................................... 51
Figure 20 Web Configurator Home Screen (Status) .............................................. 56
Figure 21 Change Administrator Login Password ................................................. 61
Figure 23 Reload the Configuration file: Via Console Port ................................... 63
Figure 24 Resetting the Switch: Via the Console Port .......................................... 64
Figure 26 Initial Setup Network Example: VLAN ................................................... 65
Figure 27 Initial Setup Network Example: Port VID .............................................. 67
Figure 28 Initial Setup Example: Management IP Address ................................... 67
23
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 39 Port Setup (ES-3124 and ES-3124-4F) ................................................ 90
Figure 47 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example .......................................... 103
Figure 49 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example ...................................... 105
Figure 50 Port Based VLAN Setup (All Connected) .............................................. 107
Figure 51 Port Based VLAN Setup (Port Isolation) ............................................... 108
Figure 55 Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and MRSTP .......................................... 118
Figure 63 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status ............................................ 140
24 List of Figures
List of Figures
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 88 MVR Group Configuration Example ..................................................... 190
Figure 89 MVR Group Configuration Example ...................................................... 190
Figure 97 Close Browser after Load Factory Defaults ........................................... 201
Figure 109 Security Alert Dialog Box (Internet Explorer) ....................................... 215
Figure 112 Example: Lock Denoting a Secure Connection .................................... 217
Figure 113 Access Control: Service Access Control ............................................. 218
Figure 114 Access Control: Remote Management ............................................... 219
Figure 120 Cluster Management: Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen ...... 230
Figure 121 Example: Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch ............... 231
Figure 122 Clustering Management Configuration .............................................. 232
25
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 127 no port-access-authenticator Command Example .............................. 289
26 List of Figures
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
List of Tables
List of Tables
Table 5 Web Configurator Screen Sub-links Details ............................................. 58
Table 36 Link Aggregation Control Protocol: Configuration .................................. 143
27
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 44 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ..................................... 158
Table 50 Single and Double Tagged 802.11Q Frame Format ............................... 173
Table 64 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients .................................... 205
Table 70 Access Control: Service Access Control ................................................ 218
Table 71 Access Control: Remote Management ................................................... 219
Table 76 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications ....................................... 227
Table 78 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example ............................................... 231
Table 79 Clustering Management Configuration ................................................... 232
28 List of Tables
List of Tables
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 83 Command Interpreter Mode Summary ................................................... 244
Table 84 Command Summary: User Mode .......................................................... 248
Table 85 Command Summary: Enable Mode ....................................................... 249
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode ............................................. 254
Table 88 Command Summary: config-vlan Commands ........................................ 271
Table 90 Troubleshooting the Start-Up of Your Switch .......................................... 315
Table 95 Physical and Environmental Specifications ............................................ 327
29
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
30 List of Tables
Preface
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Preface
Congratulations on your purchase of the ES-3124 Series Intelligent Layer 2+ Switch.
This preface introduces you to the switch and discusses the conventions of this User’s Guide.
It also provides information on other related documentation.
About This User's Guide
This manual is designed to guide you through the installation and configuration of your switch for its various applications.
Related Documentation
• Web Configurator Online Help
Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information.
• ZyXEL Web Site
Please go to http://www.zyxel.com
for product news, firmware, updated documents, and other support materials.
Syntax Conventions
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters. “Select” or “Choose” means for you to use one of the predefined choices.
• Command and arrow keys are enclosed in square brackets .
[ENTER]
means the Enter, or carriage return key;
[ESC]
means the Escape key and
[SPACE BAR]
means the Space Bar.
• Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma. For example, “In Windows, click
Start , Settings and then Control Panel ” means first click the Start button, then point your mouse pointer to Settings and then click Control Panel .
• “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other words”.
• The ES-3124 Series Intelligent Layer 2+ Switch may be referred to as “the switch” or
“the device” in this User’s Guide.
• The ES-3124PWR may be referred to as the “PWR model”.
31
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Graphics Icons Key
switch Computer
Computer DSLAM
Central Office/ ISP Internet
Server
Gateway
Hub/Switch
User Guide Feedback
Help us help you. E-mail all User Guide-related comments, questions or suggestions for improvement to [email protected] or send regular mail to The Technical Writing
Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park,
Hsinchu, 300, Taiwan. Thank you.
32 Preface
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 1
Getting to Know Your Switch
This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the switch.
1.1 Introduction
This User’s Guide covers the following switch models: ES-3124, ES-3124-4F, ES-3124-PWR and ES-3124F. The following table lists features that are specific to the individual models. The other features discussed in this chapter are common to all of the models covered in this User’s
Guide.
Note: See the product specifications in the appendix for detailed features and standards support.
Table 1 Model-specific Features
FEATURE
2 RJ-45 Gigabit ports for stacking
2 Mini-GBIC ports for stacking
24 Fast Ethernet SFP Slots
IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet compliant Ethernet Ports
MODEL
ES-3124
X
ES-3124-4F ES-3124PWR ES-3124F
X
X
X
X
X
X
With its built-in web configurator, managing and configuring the switch is easy. In addition, the switch can also be managed via Telnet, any terminal emulator program on the console port, or third-party SNMP management.
1.2 Software Features
This section describes the general software features of the switch.
DHCP Client
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual computers to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the switch as a DHCP client to obtain TCP/IP information (such as the IP address and subnet mask) from a DHCP server. If you disable the DHCP service, you must manually enter the
TCP/IP information.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 33
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
VLAN
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
Queuing
Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion.
Three scheduling services are supported: Strict Priority Queuing (SPQ), Weighted Round
Robin (WRR) and Weighted Fair Schedule (WFS). This allows the switch to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth.
Port Mirroring
Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port (the port you copy the traffic to) without interference.
Static Route
Static routes tell the switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP/IP parameters manually.
IGMP Snooping
The switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group; thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch.
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR)
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is designed for applications (such as Media-on-Demand
(MoD)) using multicast traffic across a network. MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network.
This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management.
STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) / RSTP (Rapid STP)
(R)STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches, bridges or routers. It allows a switch to interact with other (R)STP -compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network.
The switch allows you to create multiple STP configurations and assign ports to a specific tree.
34 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Link Aggregation
Link aggregation (trunking) is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher-capacity link. You may want to trunk ports if for example, it is cheaper to use multiple lower-speed links than to under-utilize a high-speed, but more costly, single-port link.
Port Authentication and Security
For security, the switch allows authentication using IEEE 802.1x with an external RADIUS server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and/or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the switch.
VLAN Stacking
Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802.1Q tagged frames that enter the network. By tagging the tagged frames (“double-tagged” frames), the service provider can manage up to 4,094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4,094 customer VLANs. This allows a service provider to provide different service, based on specific VLANs, for many different customers.
Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
With DiffServ, the switch marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at
DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow.
Classifier and Policy
You can create a policy to define actions to be performed on a traffic flow grouped by a classifier according to specific criteria such as the IP address, port number or protocol type, etc.
Cluster Management
Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one switch, called the cluster manager. The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another using same cluster management implementation.
Maintenance and Management Features
• Access Control
You can specify the service(s) and computer IP address(es) to control access to the switch for management.
• Cluster Management
Cluster management (also known as iStacking) allows you to manage switches through one switch, called the cluster manager. The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 35
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
• Configuration and Firmware Maintenance
You can backup or restore the switch configuration or upgrade the firmware on the switch.
IP Protocols
• IP Host (No routing)
• Telnet for configuration and monitoring
• SNMP for management
• SNMP MIB II (RFC 1213)
• SNMP v1 RFC 1157
• SNMPv2, SNMPv2c or later version, compliant with RFC 2011
SNMPv2 MIB for IP, RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP, RFC 2013
SNMPv2 MIB for UDP
• Ethernet MIBs RFC 1643
• Bridge MIBs RFC 1493
• SMI RFC 1155
• RMON RFC 1757
• SNMPv2, SNMPv2c RFC 2674
System Monitoring
• System status (link status, rates, statistics counters)
• SNMP
• Temperatures, voltage, fan speed reports and alarms
• Port Mirroring allows you to analyze one port's traffic from another.
Security
• System management password protection
• Port-based VLAN
• IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
• 802.1x Authentication
• Limit dynamic port MAC address learning
• Static MAC address filtering
Bandwidth Control
• The switch supports rate limiting in 64 Kbps increments allowing you to create different service plans.
• The switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group; thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch.
• Broadcast storm control
36 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Quality of Service
• Eight queues so you can ensure mission-critical data gets delivered on time.
• Follows the IEEE 802.1p priority setting standard based on source/destination MAC addresses.
1.3 Hardware Features
This section describes the hardware features of the switch.
24 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet Ports
Connect up to 24 computers or switches to the 10/100 Mbps auto-negotiating, automatic cable sensing (auto-MDIX) Ethernet RJ-45 ports.
24 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet SFP Slots
In the ES-3124F, you can install compatible 100 Mbps SFP transceivers in these 100Mbps slots to connect up to 24 computers or switches.
PoE (Power over Ethernet)
The ES-3124PWR can provide power to a device (that supports PoE) such as an access point or a switch through a 10/100Mbps Ethernet port.
2 Dual-personality Interfaces
The switch has two dual personality interfaces for uplink. A dual personality interface includes one Gigabit port and one slot for mini-GBIC transceiver (SFP module) with one port active at a time.
Mini-GBIC Slots
Install SFP transceivers in these slots to connect to other Ethernet switches at longer distances than the Ethernet port.
Gigabit Ethernet Ports
These ports allow the switch to connect to another WAN switch or daisy-chain to other switches.
Management Port
Connect a computer to this port for management purposes. You cannot access the network through this port.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 37
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Console Port
Use the console port for local management of the switch.
Backup Power Supply Port
Connect a backup power supply device to this port to ensure uninterrupted network connection in the event of a power failure.
Fans
The fans cool the switch sufficiently to allow reliable operation of the switch in even poorly ventilated rooms or basements.
1.4 Applications
This section shows a few examples of using the switch in various network environments.
1.4.1 Backbone Application
In this application, the switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future.
The switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users. You can connect computers directly to the switch’s port or connect other switches to the switch.
In this example, all computers can share high-speed applications on the server. To expand the network, simply add more networking devices such as switches, routers, computers, print servers etc.
38 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
Figure 1 Backbone Application
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
1.4.2 Bridging Example
In this example application the switch connects different company departments ( RD and
Sales ) to the corporate backbone. It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks. All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high-speed department servers via the switch. You can provide a super-fast uplink connection by using a
Gigabit Ethernet/mini-GBIC port on the switch.
Moreover, the switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to centralize multiple servers at a single location.
Figure 2 Bridging Application
1.4.3 High Performance Switched Example
The switch is ideal for connecting two networks that need high bandwidth. In the following example, use trunking to connect these two networks.
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 39
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Switching to higher-speed LANs such as ATM (Asynchronous Transmission Mode) is not feasible for most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards, restructuring your network and complex maintenance. The switch can provide the same bandwidth as ATM at much lower cost while still being able to use existing adapters and switches. Moreover, the current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other.
Figure 3 High Performance Switched Application
1.4.4 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Application Examples
This section shows a workgroup and a shared server example using 802.1Q tagged VLANs.
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Stations on a logical network belong to one group. A station can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group(s) unless such traffic first goes through a router.
For more information on VLANs, refer to
1.4.4.1 Tag-based VLAN Example
Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network performance through reduced broadcast traffic. VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding, moving or changing ports without any re-cabling.
40 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
Figure 4 Tag-based VLAN Application
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
1.4.4.2 VLAN Shared Server Example
Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server, as shown in the following example. In this example, only ports that need access to the server need belong to VLAN 1. Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too.
Figure 5 Shared Server Using VLAN Example
Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 41
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
42 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 2
Hardware Installation and
Connection
This chapter shows you how to install and connect the switch.
2.1 Freestanding Installation
1 Make sure the switch is clean and dry.
2 Set the switch on a smooth, level surface strong enough to support the weight of the switch and the connected cables. Make sure there is a power outlet nearby.
3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord.
4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet.
5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the switch. These rubber feet help protect the switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking.
Figure 6 Attaching Rubber Feet
Note: Do NOT block the ventilation holes. Leave space between devices when stacking.
For proper ventilation, allow at least 4 inches (10 cm) of clearance at the front and 3.4 inches (8 cm) at the back of the switch. This is especially important for enclosed rack installations.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 43
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
2.2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
This section lists the rack mounting requirements and precautions and describes the installation steps.
2.2.1 Rack-mounted Installation Requirements
• Two mounting brackets.
• Eight M3 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
• Four M5 flat head screws and a #2 Philips screwdriver.
Note: Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit.
2.2.1.1 Precautions
• Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains.
• Make sure the position of the switch does not make the rack unstable or top-heavy. Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit.
2.2.2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch
1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the switch, lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the switch.
Figure 7 Attaching the Mounting Brackets
2 Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the switch.
3 Repeat steps
1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the
switch.
4 You may now mount the switch on a rack. Proceed to the next section.
2.2.3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
1 Position a mounting bracket (that is already attached to the switch) on one side of the rack, lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack.
44 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
Figure 8 Mounting the Switch on a Rack
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
2 Using a #2 Philips screwdriver, install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack.
3 Repeat steps
and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack.
Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 45
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
46 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 3
Hardware Overview
This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections.
3.1 Panel Connections
The figure below shows the front panel of the switch.
Figure 9 Front Panel: ES-3124
RJ-45 Gigabit Ports for Stacking
Console Port
Figure 10
LEDs
10/100 Mbps Ethernet Ports
Front Panel: ES-3124-4F
Management Port
RJ-45 Gigabit / Mini-GBIC
Dual Personality Interfaces
Mini-GBIC Ports for Stacking
Console Port
LEDs 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Ports Management Port
RJ-45 Gigabit / Mini-GBIC
Dual Personality Interfaces
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 47
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 11 Front Panel: ES-3124PWR
RJ-45 Gigabit Ports for Stacking
Console Port
Figure 12
LEDs 10/100 Mbps PoE Ethernet Ports
Front Panel: ES-3124F
Management Port
RJ-45 Gigabit / Mini-GBIC
Dual Personality Interfaces
Mini-GBIC Ports for Stacking
Console Port
48
LEDs
100 Mbps SFP Slots Management Port
RJ-45 Gigabit / Mini-GBIC
Dual Personality Interfaces
The following table describes the ports on the panels.
Table 2 Panel Connections
CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION
All Models
Console Port Only connect this port if you want to configure the switch using the command line interface (CLI) via the console port.
Management
Port
Dual
Personality
Interfaces
Connect to a computer using an RJ-45 Ethernet cable for local configuration of the switch.
Each interface has one 1000 Base-T copper RJ-45 port and one Small Form-Factor
Pluggable (SFP) fiber port, with one port active at a time.
2 100/1000
Mbps RJ-45
Gigabit
Ports
2 Mini -
GBIC Ports
Connect these Gigabit Ethernet ports to high-bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches.
Use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for fiber-optic connections to backbone
Ethernet switches.
ES-3124, ES-3124-4F and ES-3124PWR
24 10/100
Mbps RJ-45
Ethernet Ports
Connect these ports to a computer, a hub, an Ethernet switch or router.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 2 Panel Connections (continued)
CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION
ES-3124F
24 100 Mbps
Fast Ethernet
SFP Slots
Connect these ports to a computer or switch.
ES-3124 and ES-3124PWR
2 100/1000
Mbps RJ-45
Gigabit Ports
Connect these Gigabit Ethernet ports to high-bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches or use them to daisy-chain other switches.
ES-3124-4F and ES-3124F
2 Mini-GBIC
Ports
ES-3124PWR
Use mini GBIC transceivers in these slots for fiber-optic connections to backbone network Ethernet switches or use them to daisy-chain other switches.
Power over
Ethernet (PoE)
The 24 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 Ethernet ports are compliant with the IEEE 802.3af power over Ethernet standard.
3.1.1 Console Port
For local management, you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters:
• VT100 terminal emulation
• 9600 bps
• No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
• No flow control
Connect the male 9-pin end of the console cable to the console port of the switch. Connect the female end to a serial port (COM1, COM2 or other COM port) of your computer.
3.1.2 Ethernet Ports
The switch has 24 10/100Mbps auto-negotiating, auto-crossover Ethernet ports. In 10/
100Mbps Fast Ethernet, the speed can be 10Mbps or 100Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex or full duplex.
The ES-3124 and ES-3124PWR also come with two pairs of Gigabit Ethernet/mini-GBIC ports. The mini-GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit ports. This means that if a mini-
GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time, the Gigabit port will be disabled. The speed of the Gigabit Ethernet ports can be 100Mbps or 1000Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex (at 100 Mbps) or full duplex.
An auto-negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed and duplex mode (full duplex or half duplex) of the connected device.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 49
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
An auto-crossover (auto-MDI/MDI-X) port automatically works with a straight-through or crossover Ethernet cable.
3.1.2.1 Default Ethernet Settings
The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the switch are:
• Speed: Auto
• Duplex: Auto
• Flow control: Off
3.1.3 Transceiver Slots
These are slots for mini-GBIC (Gigabit Interface Converter) transceivers or 100Mbps SFP
(Small Form-Factor Pluggable) transceivers. A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver. The switch does not come with transceivers. You must use transceivers that comply with the SFP Transceiver MultiSource Agreement (MSA). See the
SFF committee’s INF-8074i specification Rev 1.0 for details.
There are two pairs of Gigabit Ethernet/mini-GBIC ports. The mini-GBIC ports have priority over the Gigabit ports. This means that if a mini-GBIC port and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time, the Gigabit port will be disabled.
The ES-3124-4F and ES-3124F also have two mini-GBIC ports for connection to other switches.
The ES-3124F has 24 100Mbps SFP ports to connect to a computer or a switch.
You can change transceivers while the switch is operating. You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber-optic connectors.
• Type: SFP connection interface
• Connection speed: 1 Gigabit per second (Gbps)
Note: To avoid possible eye injury, do not look into an operating fiber-optic module’s connectors.
3.1.3.1 Transceiver Installation
Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver or 100Mbps SFP transceivers.
1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down.
50 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
Figure 13 Transceiver Installation Example
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place.
3 The switch automatically detects the installed transceiver. Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly.
Figure 14 Installed Transceiver
3.1.3.2 Transceiver Removal
Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver (SFP module).
1 Open the transceiver’s latch (latch styles vary).
Figure 15 Opening the Transceiver’s Latch Example
2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot.
Figure 16 Transceiver Removal Example
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 51
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
3.2 Rear Panel
The following figure shows the rear panel of the switch. The rear panel contains the connector for external backup power supply (BPS), the power receptacle, and the power switch (DC models only).
Figure 17 Rear Panel (AC models)
Figure 18 Rear Panel (DC models)
3.2.1 Power Connector
Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel.
To connect the power to the switch, insert the female end of power cord to the power receptacle on the rear panel. Connect the other end of the supplied power cord to the power source. Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans.
3.2.2 External Backup Power Supply Connector
The switch supports external backup power supply (BPS).
The backup power supply constantly monitors the status of the internal power supply. The backup power supply automatically provides power to the switch in the event of a power failure. Once the switch receives power from the backup power supply, it will not automatically switch back to using the internal power supply even when the power is resumed.
52 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
3.3 LEDs
The following table describes the LEDs.
Table 3 LEDs
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
BPS Green Blinking
On
Off
Amber Blinking
Green On
Off
The system is receiving power from the backup power supply.
The backup power supply is connected and active.
The backup power supply is not ready or not active.
The system cannot get power from the backup power supply.
PWR
SYS
ALM
Green
Red
LNK/ACT Green
Amber
Blinking
On
Off
On
Blinking
The system is turned on.
The system is off.
The system is rebooting and performing self-diagnostic tests.
The system is on and functioning properly.
The power is off or the system is not ready/malfunctioning.
There is a hardware failure.
Off The system is functioning normally.
Ethernet ports (ES-3124 and ES-3124-4F only)
Blinking The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 10 Mbps Ethernet network.
The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network.
FDX
On
Off
Amber On
Off
The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
The link to an Ethernet network is down.
The Gigabit port is negotiating in full-duplex mode.
The Gigabit port is negotiating in half-duplex mode and no collisions are occurring.
Ethernet ports (ES-3124PWR only)
LNK/ACT Green Blinking The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 10 Mbps Ethernet network.
On
Amber Blinking
The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network.
PoE
On
Off
Amber On
Off
The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
The link to an Ethernet network is down.
The switch is supplying power to the connected device that supports PoE.
No device is connected to this port or the switch is not supplying power via the Ethernet cable.
100Mbps SFP ports (ES-3124F only)
LNK Amber On The port has a successful connection.
ACT
Off
Amber Blinking
No Ethernet device is connected to this port.
The port is receiving or transmitting data.
Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 53
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 3 LEDs (continued)
LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Gigabit Port
LNK/ACT Green Blinking
FDX
Amber
Amber
On
Blinking
On
Off
On
Off
The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 1000 Mbps
Ethernet network.
The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
The system is transmitting/receiving to/from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network.
The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up.
The link to an Ethernet network is down.
The Gigabit port is negotiating in full-duplex mode.
The Gigabit port is negotiating in half-duplex mode and no collisions are occurring.
Mini-GBIC Ports
LNK Green
Green
On
Off
Blinking
The port has a successful connection.
No Ethernet device is connected to this port.
The port is receiving or transmitting data. ACT
MGMT
10
100
Green Blinking
On
Off
Amber Blinking
On
Off
The system is transmitting/receiving to/from an Ethernet device.
The port is connected at 10 Mbps.
The port is not connected at 10 Mbps or to an Ethernet device.
The system is transmitting/receiving to/from an Ethernet device.
The port is connected at 100 Mbps.
The port is not connected at 100 Mbps or to an Ethernet device.
54 Chapter 3 Hardware Overview
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 4
The Web Configurator
This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator. This guide uses the ES-3124PWR screens as an example. The screens may vary slightly for different ES-
3124 models. Not all fields are available on all models.
4.1 Introduction
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy switch setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape
Navigator 7.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScript (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
4.2 System Login
1 Start your web browser.
2 Type “http://” and the IP address of the switch (for example, the default for the management port is 192.168.0.1 and for the switch port is 192.168.1.1) in the Location or
Address field. Press [ENTER] .
3 The login screen appears. The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 . The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 55
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 19 Web Configurator: Login
4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen.
4.3 The Status Screen
The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator.
The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen.
Figure 20 Web Configurator Home Screen (Status)
B
C
D E
A
56
A - Click the menu items to open submenu links, and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
B , C , D , E - These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in.
B - Click this link to save your configuration into the switch’s nonvolatile memory.
Nonvolatile memory is the configuration of your switch that stays the same even if the switch’s power is turned off.
C Click this link to go to the status page of the switch.
D - Click this link to logout of the web configurator.
E - Click this link to display web help pages. The help pages provide descriptions for all of the configuration screens.
4.4 Menu Overview
In the navigation panel, click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links.
Table 4 Navigation Panel Sub-links Overview
BASIC SETTING
ADVANCED
APPLICATION
ROUTING PROTOCOL MANAGEMENT
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 57
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table lists the various web configurator screens within the sub-links.
Table 5 Web Configurator Screen Sub-links Details
BASIC SETTING
System Info
General Setup
Switch Setup
IP Setup
Port Setup
ADVANCED
APPLICATION
ROUTING PROTOCOL MANAGEMENT
VLAN
VLAN Status
VLAN Port Setting
Protocol Based
VLAN
Static VLAN
Static MAC Forwarding
Filtering
Spanning Tree Protocol
Status
Configuration
Bandwidth Control
Broadcast Storm
Control
Mirroring
Link Aggregation
Status
Configuration
Link Aggregation
Status
Configuration
Port Authentication
RADIUS
802.1x
Port Security
Classifier
Policy Rule
Queuing Method
VLAN Stacking
Multicast
Multicast Status
Multicast Setting
IGMP Filtering
Profile
MVR
DHCP Relay
Static Routing
DiffServ
DiffServ Setting
DSCP Setting
Maintenance
Firmware Upgrade
Restore
Configuration
Backup
Configuration
Load Factory Default
Reboot System
Access Control
SNMP
Logins
Service Access
Control
Remote
Management
Diagnostic
Syslog
Setup
Server Setup
Cluster Management
Status
Configuration
MAC Table
ARP Table
Configure Clone
58 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the links in the navigation panel.
Table 6 Navigation Panel Links
LINK DESCRIPTION
Basic Settings
System Info
General Setup
Switch Setup
IP Setup
Port Setup
This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information about the switch.
This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global switch parameters such as VLAN type, MAC address learning, GARP and priority queues.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the management IP address, subnet mask (necessary for switch management) and DNS (domain name server).
This link takes you to screens where you can configure settings for individual switch ports.
Advanced
Application
VLAN
Static MAC
Forwarding
Filtering
Spanning Tree
Protocol
Bandwidth
Control
This link takes you to screens where you can configure port-based or 802.1Q VLAN
(depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu).
This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a port. These static MAC addresses do not age out.
This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules.
This link takes you to screens where you can configure the STP/RSTP to prevent network loops.
This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum incoming bandwidth allowed on specified port(s).
This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters. Broadcast Storm
Control
Mirroring
Link Aggregation This link takes you to a screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one logical, higher-bandwidth link.
Port
Authentication
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure RADIUS (Remote
Authentication Dial-In User Service), a protocol for user authentication that allows you to use an external server to validate an unlimited number of users.
Port Security
This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference
Classifier
Policy Rule
This link takes you to a screen where you can activate maximum port security through the use of configured static MAC addresses.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure classifiers.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure policy rules.
Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure strictly priority or weighted fair scheduling with associated queue weights for each port.
VLAN Stacking
Multicast
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure VLAN stacking.
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure various multicast features and create multicast VLANs.
DHCP Relay This link takes you to a screen where you can configure DHCP relay information and specify the DHCP server(s).
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 59
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 6 Navigation Panel Links (continued)
LINK DESCRIPTION
Routing Protocol
Static Routing This link takes you to screens where you can configure static routes. A static route defines how the switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP/IP parameters manually.
This link takes you to screens where you can configure DiffServ and DSCP settings.
DiffServ
Management
Maintenance
Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management.
Diagnostic
Syslog
This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system.
This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and test port(s).
This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server.
Cluster
Management
MAC Table
This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management and view its status.
This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses (and types) of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs.
ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses – IP address resolution table.
Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can clone port attributes of a port and transfer them to other port(s).
4.4.1 Change Your Password
After you log in for the first time, it is recommended you change the default administrator password. Click Management , Access Control and then Logins to display the next screen.
60 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
Figure 21 Change Administrator Login Password
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
4.5 Saving Your Configuration
When you are done modifying the settings in a screen, click Apply to save your changes back to the run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost when the switch’s power is turned off.
Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory. Nonvolatile memory refers to the switch’s storage that remains even if the switch’s power is turned off.
Note: Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session.
4.6 Switch Lockout
You could block yourself (and all others) from accessing the switch through the web configurator if you do one of the following:
1 Deleting the management VLAN (default is VLAN 1).
2 Deleting all port-based VLANs with the CPU port as a member. The “CPU port” is the management port of the switch.
3 Filtering all traffic to the CPU port.
4 Disabling all ports.
5 Misconfiguring the text configuration file.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 61
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
6 Forgetting the password and/or IP address.
7 Preventing all services from accessing the switch.
8 Changing a service port number but forgetting it.
Note: Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the switch.
Try using the out-of-band management port before resetting the switch. The default IP address is 192.168.0.1.
4.7 Resetting the Switch
If you lock yourself (and others) out of the switch, you can try using out-of-band management.
If you still cannot correct the situation or forgot the password, you will need to reload the factory-default configuration file.
4.7.1 Reload the Configuration File
Uploading the factory-default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit, no parity, one stop bit and flow control set to none. The password will also be reset to “1234” and the IP address to 192.168.1.1.
To upload the configuration file, do the following:
1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software. See
for details.
2 Disconnect and reconnect the switch’s power to begin a session. When you reconnect the switch’s power, you will see the initial screen.
3 When you see the message “ Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds ...
” press any key to enter debug mode.
4 Type atlc after the “ Enter Debug Mode ” message.
5 Wait for the “ Starting XMODEM upload ” message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal.
6 This is an example Xmodem configuration upload using HyperTerminal. Click Transfer , then Send File to display the following screen.
62 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 22 Example Xmodem Upload
Type the configuration file's location, or click Browse to search for it.
Choose the 1K Xmodem protocol.
Then click Send .
7 After a configuration file upload, type atgo to restart the switch.
Figure 23 Reload the Configuration file: Via Console Port
Bootbase Version: V0.6 | 03/06/2006 09:21:13
RAM:Size = 32 Mbytes
DRAM POST: Testing: 32768K OK
DRAM Test SUCCESS !
FLASH: Intel 32M
ZyNOS Version: 3.70(AID.0)b0 | 4/28/2006 17:27:36
Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds.
.................................
Enter Debug Mode switch> atlc
Starting XMODEM upload (CRC mode)....
CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Total 262144 bytes received.
Erasing..
................................................................
OK switch> atgo
The switch is now reinitialized with a default configuration file including the default password of “1234”.
4.7.2 Reset to the Factory Defaults
To reset the switch back to the factory defaults, do the following:
1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software. See the chapter on hardware connections for details.
2 Disconnect and reconnect the switch's power to begin a session. When you reconnect the switch's power, you will see the initial screen.
3 When you see the message " Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds " press any key to enter debug mode.
Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 63
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
4 Type atbr after the " Enter Debug Mode " message.
Figure 24 Resetting the Switch: Via the Console Port
Bootbase Version: V0.6 | 03/06/2006 09:21:13
RAM:Size = 32 Mbytes
DRAM POST: Testing: 32768K OK
DRAM Test SUCCESS !
FLASH: Intel 32M
ZyNOS Version: 3.70(AID.0)b0 | 4/28/2006 17:27:36
Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds.
.................................
Enter Debug Mode switch> atbr
Restore default
Romfile.........................................................
..........OK
switch> atgo
5 After the resetting, type atgo to restart the switch.
4.8 Logging Out of the Web Configurator
Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator. You have to log in with your password again after you log out. This is recommended after you finish a management session both for security reasons and so as you don’t lock out other switch administrators.
Figure 25 Web Configurator: Logout Screen
4.9 Help
The web configurator’s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information.
Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen.
64 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 5
Initial Setup Example
This chapter shows how to set up the switch for an example network.
5.1 Overview
The following lists the configuration steps for the initial setup:
• Create a VLAN
• Set port VLAN ID
• Configure the switch IP management address
5.1.1 Creating a VLAN
VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port(s) belongs. You can do this with port-based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members.
In this example, you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2.
Figure 26 Initial Setup Network Example: VLAN
Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 65
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
1 Click Advanced Application and VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static
VLAN link.
2 In the Static VLAN screen, select
ACTIVE , enter a descriptive name in the Name field and enter 2 in the
VLAN Group ID field for the
VLAN2 network.
Note: The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the same VLAN ID.
3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 1 on the switch, select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only.
4 To ensure that VLAN-unaware devices (such as computers and hubs) can receive frames properly, clear the TX Tagging check box to set the switch to remove VLAN tags before sending.
5 Click Add to save the settings to the run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost when the switch’s power is turned off.
5.1.2 Setting Port VID
Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines.
In the example network, configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2.
66 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example
Figure 27 Initial Setup Network Example: Port VID
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
1 Click Advanced Applications and VLAN in the navigation panel. Then click the VLAN Port
Setting link.
2 Enter 2 in the PVID field for port
1 and click Apply to save your changes back to the run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost when the switch’s power is turned off.
5.2 Configuring Switch Management IP Address
The default management IP address of the switch is 192.168.1.1. You can configure another IP address in a different subnet for management purposes. The following figure shows an example.
Figure 28 Initial Setup Example: Management IP Address
1 Connect your computer to any Ethernet port on the switch. Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the switch.
2 Open your web browser and enter 192.168.1.1 (the default IP address) in the address bar to access the web configurator. See
Section 4.2 on page 55 for more information.
Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 67
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
3 Click Basic Setting and IP
Setup in the navigation panel.
4 Configure the related fields in the
IP Setup screen.
For the VLAN2 network, enter
192.168.2.1 as the IP address and
255.255.255.0 as the subnet mask.
5 In the VID field, enter the ID of the VLAN group to which you want this management IP address to belong. This is the same as the
VLAN ID you configure in the
Static VLAN screen.
6 Select the Manageable check box to allow the switch to be managed from the ports belonging to VLAN2 using this specified IP address.
Click Add to save your changes back to the run-time memory. Settings in the run-time memory are lost when the switch’s power is turned off.
68 Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 6
System Status and Port
Statistics
This chapter describes the system status (web configurator home page) and port details screens.
6.1 Port Status Summary
The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary table with links to each port showing statistical details.
To view the port statistics, click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next.
Note: The ES-3124PWR screen is different from the other models covered in this UG.
The screen from the ES-3124-4F model is shown for comparison.
Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 69
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 29 Status (ES-3124PWR)
Figure 30 Status (ES-3124-4F)
70 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 7 Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Port
Name
Link
State
PD
(PWR models only)
LACP
This identifies the Ethernet port. Click a port number to display the Port Details screen (refer to
).
This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting , Port Setup screen.
This field displays the speed (either 10M for 10Mbps, 100M for 100Mbps or 1000M for 1000Mbps) and the duplex ( F for full duplex or H for half). It also shows the cable type ( Copper or Fiber ) for the mini-GBIC ports.
If STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) is enabled, this field displays the STP state of the
port (see Section 11.1.3 on page 116 for more information).
If STP is disabled, this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up, otherwise, it displays STOP.
If PoE (Power over Ethernet) is enabled on a port and a powered device (PD) is connected, this field displays On .
If the PD is disconnected, or PoE is disabled on a port, this field displays Off .
This field displays whether LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) has been enabled on the port.
TxPkts
RxPkts
Errors
Tx KB/s
This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port.
This field shows the number of received frames on this port.
This field shows the number of received errors on this port.
This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.
Rx KB/s
Up Time
This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port.
This field shows the total amount of time in hours, minutes and seconds the port has been up.
Clear Counter Enter a port number and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port, or select Any to clear statistics for all ports.
6.1.1 Status: Port Details
Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics.
Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the switch.
Note: The ES-3124PWR screen is different from the other models covered in this
UG.The screen from ES-3124-4F model is shown for comparison.
Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 71
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 31 Status: Port Details (ES-3124PWR)
72 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics
Figure 32 Status: Port Details (ES-3124-4F)
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Status: Port Details
DESCRIPTION LABEL
Port Info
Name
Link
Status
This field shows the name of the port.
This field shows whether the Ethernet connection is down, and the speed/duplex mode. It also shows the cable type ( Copper or Fiber ) for the combo ports.
If STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) is enabled, this field displays the STP state of the port
(see
Section 11.1.3 on page 116 for more information).
If STP is disabled, this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up, otherwise, it displays STOP.
Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 73
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 8 Status: Port Details (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PD
PowerConsumption
(mW)
(PWR models only)
PD MaxCurrent
(mA)
(PWR models only)
This field shows the power consumption of the powered device connected to the port.
This field is not available for the Gigabit and mini-GBIC ports.
This field shows the maximum current a powered device can get from the switch. If the powered device’s power consumption exceeds the maximum power offered by the switch, the switch stops sending power.
The switch can provide up to 351.36mA current to one PD connected to each 10/
100Mbps Ethernet port and up to a total of 123.2W power to all PDs connected to the switch.
This field is not available for the Gigabit and mini-GBIC ports.
PD MaxPower (mW)
(PWR models only)
This field shows the maximum power the switch can provide through this port.
This field is not available for the Gigabit and mini-GBIC ports.
LACP
TxPkts
RxPkts
Errors
This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not.
This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port
This field shows the number of received frames on this port
This field shows the number of received errors on this port.
Tx KB/s
Rx KB/s
This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port.
This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port.
Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up.
Tx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted.
TX Packet This field shows the number of good packets (unicast, multicast and broadcast) transmitted.
Multicast
Broadcast
Pause
Tagged
This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted.
This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted.
This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets transmitted.
This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted.
Rx Packet
The following fields display detailed information about packets received.
RX Packet This field shows the number of good packets (unicast, multicast and broadcast) received.
Multicast
Broadcast
Pause
Control
This field shows the number of good multicast packets received.
This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received.
This field shows the number of 802.3x Pause packets received.
This field shows the number of control received (including those with CRC error) but it does not include the 802.3x Pause frames.
TX Collision
The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting.
Single
Multiple
This is a count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.
This is a count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision.
74 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 8 Status: Port Details (continued)
LABEL
Excessive
Late
DESCRIPTION
This is a count of frames for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions.
Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset.
This is the number of times a late collision is detected, that is, after 512 bits of the frame have already been transmitted.
Error Packet
RX CRC
Length
Runt
This field shows the number of packets received with CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check) error(s).
This field shows the number of frames received with a length that was out of range.
This field shows the number of packets received that were too short (shorter than 64 octets), including the ones with CRC errors.
Distribution
64
65-127
128-255
256-511
512-1023
1024-1518
Giant
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length.
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length.
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length.
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length.
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length.
This field shows the number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length.
This field shows the number of packets dropped because they were bigger than the maximum frame size.
Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics 75
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
76 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 7
Basic Setting
This chapter describes how to configure the System Info, General Setup , Switch Setup , IP
Setup and Port Setup screens.
7.1 Overview
The System Info screen displays general switch information (such as firmware version number) and hardware polling information (such as fan speeds). The General Setup screen allows you to configure general switch identification information. The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your switch. The real time is then displayed in the switch logs. The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global switch features. The
IP Setup screen allows you to configure a switch IP address, subnet mask(s) and DNS
(domain name server) for management purposes.
7.2 System Information
In the navigation panel, click Basic Setting and System Info to display the screen as shown.
You can check the firmware version number and monitor the switch temperature, fan speeds and voltage in this screen.
Note: The ES-3124PWR screen is different from the other models covered in this UG.
The screen from the ES-3124-4F model is shown for comparison.
Chapter 7 Basic Setting 77
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 33 System Info (ES-3124PWR)
78 Chapter 7 Basic Setting
Figure 34 System Info (ES-3124-4F)
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 9 System Info
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the switch for identification purposes.
ZyNOS F/W
Version
This field displays the version number of the switch 's current firmware including the date created.
Ethernet
Address
This field refers to the Ethernet MAC (Media Access Control) address of the switch.
PoE Status (this section is available on the PWR models only)
Total Power
(W)
This is the total power in Watts the switch can provide over the Ethernet.
Consuming
Power (W)
Remaining
Power (W)
Hardware Monitor
This is the power consumed by PoE compatible devices connected to the switch.
This is the remaining power in Watts the switch can provide over the Ethernet.
Temperature
Unit
The switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the temperature rises above the threshold. You may choose the temperature unit
(Centigrade or Fahrenheit) in this field.
Temperature MAC , CPU and PHY refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the switch’s printed circuit board. ENV refers to the environmental or ambient temperature within the device (PWR models only).
Current This field displays the current temperature measured at this sensor.
Chapter 7 Basic Setting 79
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 9 System Info (continued)
LABEL
MAX
MIN
Threshold
Status
Fan speed
(RPM)
Current
MAX
MIN
Threshold
Status
Voltage (V)
Current
MAX
MIN
Threshold
Status
DESCRIPTION
This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor.
This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor.
This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor.
This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above.
A properly functioning fan is an essential component (along with a sufficiently ventilated, cool operating environment) in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold. Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown.
This field displays this fan's current speed in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM).
This field displays this fan's maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute
(RPM).
This field displays this fan's minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute
(RPM). "<41" is displayed for speeds too small to measure (under 2000 RPM).
This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work.
Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed. Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed.
The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range.
This is the current voltage reading.
This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point.
This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point.
This field displays the minimum voltage at which the switch should work.
Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point; otherwise Error is displayed.
7.3 General Setup
Use this screen to configure general settings such as the system name and time. Click Basic
Setting and General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
80 Chapter 7 Basic Setting
Figure 35 General Setup
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 10 General Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Name
Location
Contact Person's
Name
Login
Precedence
Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes. This name consists of up to
64 printable characters; spaces are allowed.
Enter the geographic location of your switch. You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters; spaces are not allowed.
Enter the name of the person in charge of this switch. You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters; spaces are not allowed.
Use this drop-down list box to select which database the switch should use (first) to authenticate an administrator (user for switch management).
Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control Logins screen. The
RADIUS is an external server. Before you specify the priority, make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first.
Select Local Only to have the switch just check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control Logins screen.
Select Local then RADIUS to have the switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control Logins screen. If the user name is not found, the switch then checks the user database on the specified RADIUS server. You need to configure Port Authentication Radius first.
Select RADIUS Only to have the switch just check the user database on the specified RADIUS server for a login username, password and the access privilege.
Chapter 7 Basic Setting 81
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 10 General Setup (continued)
LABEL
Use Time Server when Bootup
Time Server IP
Address
Current Time
New Time
(hh:min:ss)
Current Date
New Date (yyyymm-dd)
Time Zone
Apply
DESCRIPTION
Enter the time service protocol that your timeserver uses. Not all time servers support all protocols, so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works. The main differences between them are the time format.
When you select the Daytime (RFC 867) format, the switch displays the day, month, year and time with no time zone adjustment. When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone.
Time (RFC-868) format displays a 4-byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970/1/1 at 0:0:0.
NTP (RFC-1305) is similar to Time (RFC-868).
None is the default value. Enter the time manually. Each time you turn on the switch, the time and date will be reset to 1970-1-1 0:0.
Enter the IP address of your timeserver. The switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds. If you select a timeserver that is unreachable, then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds. Please wait.
This field displays the time you open this menu (or refresh the menu).
Enter the new time in hour, minute and second format. The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply .
This field displays the date you open this menu.
Enter the new date in year, month and day format. The new date then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply .
Select the time difference between UTC (Universal Time Coordinated, formerly known as GMT, Greenwich Mean Time) and your time zone from the drop-down list box.
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
7.4 Introduction to VLANs
A VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
In MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain.
82 Chapter 7 Basic Setting
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Note: VLAN is unidirectional; it only governs outgoing traffic.
See
Chapter 8 on page 93 for information on port-based and 802.1Q tagged VLANs.
7.5 Switch Setup Screen
Click Basic Setting and then Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown. The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802.1Q
or Port
Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen. Refer to the chapter on VLAN.
Figure 36 Switch Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 11 Switch Setup
LABEL
VLAN Type
Bridge Control
Protocol
Transparency
MAC Address
Learning
DESCRIPTION
Choose 802.1Q
or Port Based . The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802.1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen.
See
Chapter 8 on page 93 for more information.
Select Active to allow the switch to handle bridging control protocols (STP for example). You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in the Port Setup screen.
MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts. For MAC address learning to occur on a port, the port must be active.
Chapter 7 Basic Setting 83
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 11 Switch Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Aging Time
GARP Timer: Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values. See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information.
Join Timer
Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds. This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out (and must be relearned).
Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a Join Period timer. The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and
65535 milliseconds; the default is 200 milliseconds. See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information.
Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds.
Each port has a single Leave Period timer. Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer ; the default is 600 milliseconds.
Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave All Period timer. Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer.
Priority Queue Assignment
IEEE 802.1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service. Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port. Use the next two fields to configure the priority level-to-physical queue mapping.
The switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels. On the switch, traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Priority Level (The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p).
Level 7
Level 6
Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay).
Level 5
Level 4
Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems
Network Architecture) transactions.
Level 3
Level 2
Level 1
Level 0
Apply
Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
This is for “spare bandwidth”.
This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.
Typically used for best-effort traffic.
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
84 Chapter 7 Basic Setting
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
7.6 IP Setup
Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device, the default domain name server and add switch IP address.
7.6.1 Management IP Addresses
The switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network. The factory default IP address is 192.168.1.1. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. The factory default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
You can configure up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the switch from the ports belonging to the pre-defined VLAN(s).
Note: You must configure a VLAN first.
Chapter 7 Basic Setting 85
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 37 IP Setup
86 Chapter 7 Basic Setting
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 12 IP Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Domain
Name Server
Default
Management
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address.
Specify which traffic flow (In-Band or Out-of-band) the switch is to send packets originating from itself (such as SNMP traps) or packets with unknown source.
Select Out-of-band to have the switch send the packets to the out-of-band management port. This means that device(s) connected to the other port(s) do not receive these packets.
Select In-Band to have the switch send the packets to all ports except the out-of-band management port to which connected device(s) do not receive these packets.
In-band
Management
IP Address
DHCP Client Select this option if you have a DHCP server that can assign the switch an IP address, subnet mask, a default gateway IP address and a domain name server IP address automatically.
Static IP
Address
Select this option if you don’t have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP address information to the switch. You need to fill in the following fields when you select this option.
IP Address
IP Subnet
Mask
Default
Gateway
VID
Enter the IP address of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192.168.1.1.
Enter the IP subnet mask of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example
255.255.255.0.
Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for example 192.168.1.254.
Enter the VLAN identification number associated with the switch IP address. VID is the
VLAN ID of the CPU and is used for management only. The default is "1". All ports, by default, are fixed members of this "management VLAN" in order to manage the device from any port. If a port is not a member of this VLAN, then users on that port cannot access the device. To access the switch make sure the port that you are connected to is a member of Management VLAN.
Out-of-band Management IP Address
IP Address Enter the IP address of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192.168.0.1.
If you change this IP address, make sure the computer connected to this management port is in the same subnet before accessing the switch.
IP Subnet
Mask
Default
Gateway
Apply
Enter the IP subnet mask of your switch in dotted decimal notation for example
255.255.255.0.
Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation, for example 192.168.0.254.
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel
In-band IP
Addresses
IP Address
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
You can create up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the switch from the ports belonging to the pre-defined VLAN(s). You must configure a VLAN first.
Enter the IP address for managing the switch by the members of the VLAN specified in the VID field below.
Chapter 7 Basic Setting 87
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 12 IP Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Subnet
Mask
VID
Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation.
Default
Gateway
Type the VLAN group identification number.
Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation.
Manageable Select this option to allow the switch to be managed using this specified IP address.
Add Click Add to save the new rule to the switch’s run-time memory. It then displays in the summary table at the bottom of the screen.
Cancel
Index
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
This field displays the index number of an entry. Click an index number to edit the rule.
IP Address This field displays the IP address.
Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask.
VID
Default
Gateway
This field displays the VLAN identification number of the network.
This field displays the IP address of the default outgoing gateway.
Manageable This field displays whether the switch can be managed using the specified IP address.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click to clear the Delete check boxes.
7.7 Port Setup
Use this screen to configure switch port settings. Click Basic Setting and then Port Setup in the navigation panel to enter the port configuration screen.
Full-duplex mode operation only applies to point-to-point access (for example, when attaching the switch to a workstation, server, or another switch). When connecting to hubs, use a standard cascaded connection set at half-duplex operation.
Auto-negotiation regulates the speed and duplex of each port, based on the capability of both devices. When auto-negotiation is turned on, an Ethernet port on the ZyXEL switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode. If the peer
Ethernet port does not support auto-negotiation or turns off this feature, the ZyXEL switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode. When the ZyXEL switch’s auto-negotiation is turned off, an Ethernet port uses the preconfigured speed and duplex mode when making a connection, thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect.
88 Chapter 7 Basic Setting
Figure 38 Port Setup (ES-3124PWR)
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Basic Setting 89
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 39 Port Setup (ES-3124 and ES-3124-4F)
90 Chapter 7 Basic Setting
Figure 40 Port Setup (ES-3124F)
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 13 Port Setup
LABEL
*
DESCRIPTION
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Port
Active
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
This is the port index number.
Select this check box to enable a port. The factory default for all ports is enabled. A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur.
Chapter 7 Basic Setting 91
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 13 Port Setup (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Name
Type
Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port.
This field displays 10/100M for an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connection, 100M for an
Fast Ethernet connection and 10/100/1000M for Gigabit connections.
Speed/Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port.
Choices are Auto , 10M/Half Duplex , 10M/Full Duplex , 100M/Half Duplex , 100M/
Full Duplex and 1000M/Full Duplex (for Gigabit ports only).
Note: The connection type of an Fast Ethernet SFP port is fixed at
100M/Full Duplex .
Flow Control
Selecting Auto (auto-negotiation) allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support.
When auto-negotiation is turned on, a port on the switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode. If the peer port does not support auto-negotiation or turns off this feature, the switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode.
When the switch’s auto-negotiation is turned off, a port uses the pre-configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection, thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect.
A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses. Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port.
The switch uses IEEE802.3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode.
IEEE802.3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port, causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill.
Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a "collision" signal to the sending port (mimicking a state of packet collision) causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later. Select Flow Control to enable it.
802.1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a (802.1p) priority queue tag.
See Priority Queue Assignment in
for more information.
BPDU Control Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port. You must activate bridging control protocol transparency in the Switch Setup screen first.
Select Peer to process any BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) received on this port.
Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port.
Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port.
Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU.
PD
(PWR models only)
This field is only available on the PWR models, but not available for the Gigabit or mini-GBIC ports.
A powered device (PD) is a device such as an access point or a switch, that supports
PoE (Power over Ethernet) so that it can receive power from another device through a
10/100Mbps Ethernet port.
Select the check box to allow a powered device (connected to the port) to receive power from the switch.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
92 Chapter 7 Basic Setting
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 8
VLAN
The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen. This chapter shows you how to configure 802.1Q tagged and port-based VLANs.
8.1 Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The
VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier, residing within the type/length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information, starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame).
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of 4,096 (212) VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN
ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094.
TPID
2 Bytes
User Priority
3 Bits
CFI
1 Bit
VLAN ID
12 bits
8.1.1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames
Each port on the switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware switch, the switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag. To forward a frame from an 802.1Q VLAN-unaware switch to an 802.1Q VLAN-aware switch, the switch first decides where to forward the frame, and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port's default VID. The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports, but this can be changed.
A broadcast frame (or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system) is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID (except the ingress port itself), thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain.
Chapter 8 VLAN 93
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
8.2 Automatic VLAN Registration
GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches.
8.2.1 GARP
GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol) allows network switches to register and deregister attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN. GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application, for example, GVRP .
8.2.1.1 GARP Timers
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.
8.2.2 GVRP
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network. Enable this function to permit VLANs groups beyond the local switch.
Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802.1Q VLAN terminology.
Table 14 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Terminology
VLAN PARAMETER TERM
VLAN Type Permanent VLAN
DESCRIPTION
This is a static VLAN created manually.
VLAN Administrative
Control
Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration/ deregistration process.
Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members.
VLAN Tag Control
Registration
Forbidden
Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP.
Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted.
Untagged
Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the specified VLAN.
Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don't tag all outgoing frames transmitted.
94 Chapter 8 VLAN
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 14 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Terminology (continued)
VLAN PARAMETER TERM
VLAN Port Port VID
Acceptable Frame
Type
Ingress filtering
DESCRIPTION
This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received.
You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames, just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port.
If set, the switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member
8.3 Port VLAN Trunking
Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port. This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices.
Refer to the following figure. Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 (V1 and V2) on devices A and B. Without VLAN Trunking, you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C, D and E; otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags. However, with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port(s) in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices (A and B). C, D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 (VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches) to pass through their VLAN trunking port(s).
Figure 41 Port VLAN Trunking
8.4 Select the VLAN Type
1 Select a VLAN type in the Switch Setup screen.
Chapter 8 VLAN 95
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 42 Switch Setup: Select VLAN Type
8.5 Static VLAN
Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be
• sent to a VLAN group as normal depends on its VLAN tag.
• sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not.
• blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag.
You can also tag all outgoing frames (that were previously untagged) from a port with the specified VID.
8.5.1 Static VLAN Status
See
Section 8.1 on page 93 for more information on Static VLAN. Click
Advanced
Application , VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next.
Figure 43 VLAN: VLAN Status
96
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 15 VLAN: VLAN Status
LABEL
The Number of
VLAN
Index
DESCRIPTION
This is the number of VLANs configured on the switch.
This is the VLAN index number. Click on this to view port settings for the specified
VLAN.
Chapter 8 VLAN
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 15 VLAN: VLAN Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen.
Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static
VLAN was set up.
Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the switch; static - added as a permanent entry or other - added using Multicast VLAN
Registration (MVR).
dynamic - using GVRP,
Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous/next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen.
8.5.2 Static VLAN Details
for more information on static VLAN. Click on an index number in the VLAN
Status screen to display VLAN details.
Figure 44 Static VLAN Details
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 16 Static VLAN Details
LABEL
VLAN Status
DESCRIPTION
Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen.
VID
Port Number
This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen.
This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN. A tagged port is marked as T , an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as “ – “.
Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static
VLAN was set up.
Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the switch; static - added as a permanent entry or other - added using Multicast VLAN
Registration (MVR).
dynamic - using GVRP,
Chapter 8 VLAN 97
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
8.5.3 Configure a Static VLAN
Use this screen to configure and view 802.1Q VLAN parameters for the switch. See Section
8.5 on page 96 for more information on static VLAN. To configure a static VLAN, click
Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next.
98 Chapter 8 VLAN
Figure 45 VLAN: Static VLAN
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 8 VLAN 99
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 17 VLAN: Static VLAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
ACTIVE
Name
Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings.
Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes.
VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry; the valid range is between 1 and 4094.
Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring.
* Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Control
Tagging
Add
Cancel
Clear
VID
Active
Name
Delete
Cancel
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP. This is the default selection.
Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group.
Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group.
Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID.
Click Add to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Click Clear to start configuring the screen again.
This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group. Click the number to edit the
VLAN settings.
This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled ( Yes ) or disabled ( No ).
This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group.
Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
8.5.4 Configure VLAN Port Settings
Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN (IEEE 802.1Q) settings on a port. See
for more information on static VLAN. Click the VLAN Port
Setting link in the VLAN Status screen.
100 Chapter 8 VLAN
Figure 46 VLAN: VLAN Port Setting
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 8 VLAN 101
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 VLAN: VLAN Port Setting
LABEL
GVRP
Port Isolation
Port
*
DESCRIPTION
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network.
Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local switch.
Port Isolation allows each port to communicate only with the CPU management port but not communicate with each other. All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected. This option is the most limiting but also the most secure.
This field displays the port number.
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Ingress Check
PVID
GVRP
If this check box is selected for a port, the device discards incoming frames for
VLANs that do not include this port in its member set.
Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering.
Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID.
Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port.
Acceptable Frame
Type
Specify the type of frames allowed on a port. Choices are All , Tag Only and Untag
Only .
Select All from the drop-down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port. This is the default setting.
Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port. All untagged frames will be dropped.
Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port. All tagged frames will be dropped.
VLAN Trunking
Apply
Cancel
Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers (but not ports directly connected to end users) to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the switch.
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
102 Chapter 8 VLAN
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
8.6 Protocol Based VLANs
Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify. When an upstream frame is received on a port (configured for a protocol based
VLAN), the switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol. The untagged packets of the same protocol are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN. One advantage of using protocol based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol.
Note: Protocol based VLAN applies to un-tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN.
For example, port 1, 2, 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100, and port 4, 5, 6 and 7 belong to static VLAN 120. You configure a protocol based VLAN A with priority 3 for ARP traffic received on port 1, 2 and 3. You also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 2 for Apple
Talk traffic received on port 6 and 7. All upstream ARP traffic from port 1, 2 and 3 will be grouped together, and all upstream Apple Talk traffic from port 6 and 7 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic, when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C.
Figure 47 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example
8.7 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN
Click Advanced Applications, VLAN, VLAN Port Setting, Protocol Based VLAN to display the configuration screen as shown.
Note: Protocol-based VLAN applies to un-tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN.
Chapter 8 VLAN 103
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 48 Protocol Based VLAN
104
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 Protocol Based VLAN Setup
LABEL
Active
Port
DESCRIPTION
Check this box to activate this protocol based VLAN.
Type a port to be included in this protocol based VLAN.
This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based
VLAN. See
Chapter 8 on page 93 for more details on setting up VLANs.
Name Enter up to 11 alphanumeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN.
Ethernet-type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in this protocol based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal notation. For example the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800, and Novell IPX protocol is 8137.
Note: Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to 0x05ff are not allowed to be used for protocol based VLANs.
VID
Priority
Add
Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the port belongs. This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications , VLAN screens.
Select the priority level that the switch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN.
Click Add to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel
Index
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN. Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing protocol based VLAN.
Active
Port
This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not.
This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN.
Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN.
Ethernet Type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN.
VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port.
Chapter 8 VLAN
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 19 Protocol Based VLAN Setup (continued)
LABEL
Priority
Delete
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based VLAN.
Click this to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
8.8 Create an IP-based VLAN Example
This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1, 4 and 8. Follow these steps:
1 Activate this protocol based VLAN.
2 Type the port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN. Type 1 .
3 Give this protocol-based VLAN a descriptive name. Type IP-VLAN .
4 Select the protocol. Leave the default value IP .
5 Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN. In our example we already created a static
VLAN with an ID of 5. Type 5 .
6 Leave the priority set to 0 and click Add .
Figure 49 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example
To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN.
1 Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry. Click 1 .
2 Change the value in the Port field to the next port you want to add.
3 Click Add .
Chapter 8 VLAN 105
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
8.9 Port-based VLAN Setup
Port-based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port.
Port-based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port. Therefore, if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, for example, between conference rooms in a hotel, you must define the egress (an egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through which a data packet leaves) for both ports.
Port-based VLANs are specific only to the switch on which they were created.
Note: When you activate port-based VLAN, the switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1.
You cannot change it.
In screens (such as IP Setup and Filtering ) that require a VID, you must enter
1 as the VID.
The port-based VLAN setup screen is shown next. The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports.
8.9.1 Configure a Port-based VLAN
Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup
screen (see Figure 42 on page 96 )
and then click VLAN from the navigation panel to display the next screen.
106 Chapter 8 VLAN
Figure 50 Port Based VLAN Setup (All Connected)
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 8 VLAN 107
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 51 Port Based VLAN Setup (Port Isolation)
108 Chapter 8 VLAN
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 20 Port Based VLAN Setup
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation .
All connected means all ports can communicate with each other, that is, there are no virtual LANs. All incoming and outgoing ports are selected. This option is the most flexible but also the least secure.
Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other. All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected. This option is the most limiting but also the most secure.
After you make your selection, click Apply (top right of screen) to display the screens as mentioned above. You can still customize these settings by adding/deleting incoming or outgoing ports, but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen.
Incoming These are the ingress ports; an ingress port is an incoming port, that is, a port through which a data packet enters. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, you must define the ingress port for both ports. The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left (its outgoing port).
CPU refers to the switch management port. By default it forms a VLAN with all
Ethernet ports. If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the switch cannot be managed from that port.
Outgoing
Apply
These are the egress ports; an egress port is an outgoing port, that is, a port through which a data packet leaves. If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other, you must define the egress port for both ports.
CPU refers to the switch management port. By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports. If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the switch cannot be managed from that port.
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Chapter 8 VLAN 109
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
110 Chapter 8 VLAN
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 9
Static MAC Forwarding
Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding.
9.1 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding
A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table.
Static MAC addresses do not age out. When you set up static MAC address rules, you are setting static MAC addresses for a port. This may reduce the need for broadcasting.
Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the switch. See
for more information on port security.
Click Advanced Applications, Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 52 Static MAC Forwarding
Chapter 9 Static MAC Forwarding 111
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 21 Static MAC Forwarding
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Name
Select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box.
Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule.
MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs.
Note: Static MAC addresses do not age out.
VID
Port
Enter the VLAN identification number.
Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded.
Add
Cancel
Clear
Index
Active
Click Add to save your rule to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click
Click
Cancel
Clear to reset the fields. to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port.
This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active ( Yes ) or not ( No ). You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it.
Name
MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs.
VID
Port
This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address-forwarding rule.
This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group.
This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded.
Delete
Cancel
Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
112 Chapter 9 Static MAC Forwarding
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 10
Filtering
This chapter discusses static IP and MAC address port filtering.
10.1 Configure a Filtering Rule
Filtering means sifting traffic going through the switch based on the source and/or destination
MAC addresses and VLAN group (ID).
Click Advanced Application and Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next.
Figure 53 Filtering
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 22 FIltering
LABEL
Active
Name
DESCRIPTION
Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule. You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box.
Type a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
Chapter 10 Filtering 113
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 22 FIltering (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Action
MAC
VID
Add
Cancel
Select Discard source to drop frame from the source MAC address (specified in the
MAC field). The switch can still send frames to the MAC address.
Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address (specified in the MAC address). The switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address.
Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to/from the MAC address specified in the MAC field.
Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs.
Type the VLAN group identification number.
Click Add to save this rule to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click to reset the fields.
Clear
Index
Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to change the settings.
Active
Name
This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated.
This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
MAC
Address
VID
Action
Delete
This field displays the source/destination MAC address with the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs.
This field displays the VLAN identification number.
This field displays the filtering action ( Discard both , Discard source or Discard dest.
Check the rule(s) that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the
Delete button.
Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox(es) in the Delete column.
).
114 Chapter 10 Filtering
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 11
Spanning Tree Protocol
The switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP) as defined in the following standards.
• IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol
• IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
The switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations (or trees). Ports can then be assigned to the trees.
11.1 STP/RSTP Overview
(R)STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches, bridges or routers. It allows a switch to interact with other (R)STP -compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network.
The switch uses IEEE 802.1w RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP (while also being backwards compatible with STPonly aware bridges). In RSTP, topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change. In STP, a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network. Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database. In RSTP, the port states are Discarding, Learning, and Forwarding.
Note: In this user’s guide, “STP” refers to both STP and RSTP.
11.1.1 STP Terminology
The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree; it is the bridge with the lowest identifier value
(MAC address).
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port. It is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached. The slower the media, the higher the cost.
Table 23 STP Path Costs
LINK SPEED RECOMMENDED VALUE
RECOMMENDED
RANGE
Path Cost 4Mbps
Path Cost 10Mbps
250
100
100 to 1000
50 to 600
ALLOWED RANGE
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 115
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 23 STP Path Costs
LINK SPEED RECOMMENDED VALUE
RECOMMENDED
RANGE
Path Cost 16Mbps
Path Cost 100Mbps
Path Cost 1Gbps
Path Cost 10Gbps
62
19
4
2
40 to 400
10 to 60
3 to 10
1 to 5
ALLOWED RANGE
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
1 to 65535
On each bridge, the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root.
It is the port on this switch with the lowest path cost to the root (the root path cost). If there is no root port, then this switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network.
For each LAN segment, a designated bridge is selected. This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN.
11.1.2 How STP Works
After a bridge determines the lowest cost-spanning tree with STP, it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs, and disables all other ports that participate in STP. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports, eliminating any possible network loops.
STP-aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) periodically. When the bridged LAN topology changes, a new spanning tree is constructed.
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs
(Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the root bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello
BPDU after a predefined interval (Max Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down. This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re-establish a valid network topology.
11.1.3 STP Port States
STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping. A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops.
Table 24 STP Port States
PORT STATE DESCRIPTION
Disabled
Blocking
Listening
STP is disabled (default).
Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed.
All BPDUs are received and processed.
116 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 24 STP Port States
PORT STATE DESCRIPTION
Learning
Forwarding
All BPDUs are received and processed. Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded.
All BPDUs are received and processed. All information frames are received and forwarded.
11.1.4 Multiple RSTP
MRSTP (Multiple RSTP) is ZyXEL’s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and
STP. With MRSTP, you can have more than one spanning tree on your switch and assign port(s) to each tree. Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information.
In the following example, there are two RSTP instances ( MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2 ) on switch
A .
To set up MRSTP, activate MRSTP on the switch and specify which port(s) belong to which spanning tree.
Note: Each port can belong to one STP tree only.
Figure 54 MRSTP Network Example
11.2 Spanning Tree Protocol Main Screen
The switch allows you to configure a single RSTP configuration or you can configure multiple configurations. Click Advanced Application , Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to choose whether you want to configure multiple or a single Spanning Tree Protocol configuration.
Note: This screen is only available if neither RSTP or MRSTP is active. Once you select RSTP or MRSTP this screen displays the status of your configuration.
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 117
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 55 Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and MRSTP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Spanning Tree Protocol: Status
LABEL
RSTP
MRSTP
DESCRIPTION
This link takes you to the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol configuration screen. See
This link takes you to the Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol configuration screen. See
11.3 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
Use this screen to configure RSTP settings, see
Section 11.1 on page 115 for more information
on RSTP. Click RSTP in the Advanced Application , Spanning Tree Protocol screen.
118 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
Figure 56 RSTP: Configuration
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 119
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 26 RSTP: Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status
Active
Bridge Priority
Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen (see
Select this check box to activate RSTP. Clear this checkbox to disable RSTP.
Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch, root port and designated port.
The switch with the highest priority (lowest numeric value) becomes the STP root switch. If all switches have the same priority, the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch. Select a value from the drop-down list box.
The lower the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this bridge.
Bridge Priority determines the root bridge, which in turn determines Hello Time,
Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
Hello Time
Max Age
This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) configuration message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds.
This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure. All switch ports (except for designated ports) should receive BPDUs at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information
(provided in the last BPDU) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network. The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch will wait before changing states.
This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result. The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds.
As a general rule:
Port
*
Active
Priority
Path Cost
Note: 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
This field displays the port number.
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port.
Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the media, the higher the cost - see
Table 23 on page 115 for more information.
120 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 26 RSTP: Configuration (continued)
LABEL
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
11.4 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
Click Advanced Application , Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next. See
for more information on RSTP.
Note: This screen is available only after you activate RSTP on the switch.
Figure 57 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol: Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 27 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol: Status
LABEL
Configuration
Bridge
Bridge ID
Hello Time
(second)
DESCRIPTION
Click Configuration
to configure RSTP settings. Refer to Section 11.3 on page
Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this switch. This switch may also be the root bridge.
This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address. This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the switch is the root switch.
This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configuration message. The root bridge determines Hello Time , Max Age and
Forwarding Delay
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 121
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 27 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol: Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Max Age (second) This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure.
Forwarding Delay
(second)
This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that is, listening to learning to forwarding).
Cost to Bridge
Port ID
This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch.
This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.
This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Topology Changed
Times
Time Since Last
Change
This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
11.5 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
To configure MRSTP, select MRSTP in the Advanced Application , Spanning Tree
Protocol
screen. See Section 11.1 on page 115 for more information on MRSTP.
122 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
Figure 58 MRSTP: Configuration
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 123
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 28 MRSTP: Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status
Tree
Active
Bridge Priority
Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen (see
).
This is a read only index number of the STP trees.
Select this check box to activate an STP tree. Clear this checkbox to disable an
STP tree.
Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch, root port and designated port.
The switch with the highest priority (lowest numeric value) becomes the STP root switch. If all switches have the same priority, the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch. Select a value from the drop-down list box.
The lower the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this bridge.
Bridge Priority determines the root bridge, which in turn determines Hello Time,
Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
Hello Time
Max Age
This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units) configuration message generations by the root switch. The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds.
This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure. All switch ports (except for designated ports) should receive BPDUs at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information
(provided in the last BPDU) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network. The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds.
Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch will wait before changing states.
This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result. The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds.
As a general rule:
Port
*
Active
Priority
Path Cost
Tree
Note: 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age >= 2 * (Hello Time + 1)
This field displays the port number.
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Select this check box to activate STP on this port.
Configure the priority for each port here.
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first. The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128.
Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge. The slower the media, the higher the cost - see
Table 23 on page 115 for more information.
Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in.
124 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 28 MRSTP: Configuration (continued)
LABEL
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
11.6 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status
Click Advanced Application , Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next. See
for more information on MRSTP.
Note: This screen is available only after you activate MRSTP on the switch.
Figure 59 MRSTP: Status
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 29 Spanning Tree Protocol: Status
LABEL
Configuration
Tree
Bridge
Bridge ID
Hello Time
(second)
DESCRIPTION
Click Configuration to configure MRSTP settings. Refer to
Select which STP tree configuration you want to view.
Root refers to the base of the spanning tree (the root bridge). Our Bridge is this switch. This switch may also be the root bridge.
This is the unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address. This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the switch is the root switch.
This is the time interval (in seconds) at which the root switch transmits a configuration message. The root bridge determines Hello Time , Max Age and
Forwarding Delay
Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 125
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 29 Spanning Tree Protocol: Status (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Max Age (second) This is the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure.
Forwarding Delay
(second)
This is the time (in seconds) the root switch will wait before changing states (that is, listening to learning to forwarding).
Cost to Bridge
Port ID
This is the path cost from the root port on this switch to the root switch.
This is the priority and number of the port on the switch through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.
This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured.
Topology Changed
Times
Time Since Last
Change
This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured.
126 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 12
Bandwidth Control
This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth
Control screen.
12.1 Bandwidth Control Overview
Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and/or outgoing traffic flows on a port.
12.1.1 CIR and PIR
The Committed Information Rate (CIR) is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a port. The Peak Information Rate (PIR) is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion.
The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth .
If the CIR is reached, packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR. When network congestion occurs, packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop.
Note: The CIR should be less than the PIR.
The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth.
12.2 Bandwidth Control Setup
Click Advanced Application and then Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next.
Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control 127
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 60 Bandwidth Control
128
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 30 Bandwidth Control
LABEL
Active
Port
DESCRIPTION
Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the switch.
This field displays the port number.
Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 30 Bandwidth Control (continued)
LABEL
*
DESCRIPTION
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Ingress Rate
Active
Commit
Rate
Select this check box to activate commit rate limits on this port.
Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the incoming traffic flow on a port. The commit rate should be less than the peak rate. The sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth.
Active Select this check box to activate peak rate limits on this port.
Peak Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the incoming traffic flow on a port.
Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port.
Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second (Kbps) for the out-going traffic flow on a port.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control 129
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
130 Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 13
Broadcast Storm Control
This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature.
13.1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup
Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast, multicast and destination lookup failure (DLF) packets the switch receives per second on the ports. When the maximum number of allowable broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets is reached per second, the subsequent packets are discarded. Enable this feature to reduce broadcast, multicast and/or DLF packets in your network. You can specify limits for each packet type on each port.
Click Advanced Application , Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next.
Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control 131
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 61 Broadcast Storm Control
132 Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 31 Broadcast Storm Control
LABEL
Active
Port
*
DESCRIPTION
Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the switch. Clear this check box to disable this feature.
This field displays a port number.
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Broadcast (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port receives per second.
Multicast (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second.
DLF (pkt/s) Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure (DLF) packets the port receives per second.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control 133
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
134 Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 14
Mirroring
This chapter discusses the Mirror setup screens.
14.1 Port Mirroring Setup
Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port (the port you copy the traffic to) in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference.
Click Advanced Application , Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen. Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port.
Chapter 14 Mirroring 135
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 62 Mirroring
136 Chapter 14 Mirroring
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 32 Mirroring
LABEL
Active
Monitor
Port
Port
*
DESCRIPTION
Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the switch. Clear this check box to disable the feature.
The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port(s). Enter the port number of the monitor port.
This field displays the port number.
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Mirrored
Direction
Apply
Cancel
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port.
Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop-down list box.
Choices are Egress (outgoing), Ingress (incoming) and Both .
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Chapter 14 Mirroring 137
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
138 Chapter 14 Mirroring
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 15
Link Aggregation
This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical, higherbandwidth link.
15.1 Link Aggregation Overview
Link aggregation (trunking) is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher-capacity link. You may want to trunk ports if for example, it is cheaper to use multiple lower-speed links than to under-utilize a high-speed, but more costly, single-port link.
However, the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have. A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports.
The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group.
15.2 Dynamic Link Aggregation
The switch adheres to the IEEE 802.3ad standard for static and dynamic (LACP) port trunking.
The switch supports the link aggregation IEEE802.3ad standard. This standard describes the
Link Aggregate Control Protocol (LACP), which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups.
When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port, the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups. LACP also allows port redundancy, that is, if an operational port fails, then one of the “standby” ports become operational without user intervention. Please note that:
• You must connect all ports point-to-point to the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking.
• LACP only works on full-duplex links.
• All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type, speed, duplex mode and flow control settings.
Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops.
Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 139
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
15.2.1 Link Aggregation ID
LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information 1 :
Table 33 Link Aggregation ID: Local Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY
0000 00-00-00-00-00 0000
PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
00 0000
Table 34 Link Aggregation ID: Peer Switch
SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY
0000 00-00-00-00-00 0000
PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER
00 0000
15.3 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status
Click Advanced Application , Link Aggregation in the navigation panel. The Link
Aggregation Control Protocol Status screen displays by default. See
for more information.
Figure 63 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status
140
1.
Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group, not the individual port.
Chapter 15 Link Aggregation
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 35 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index
Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of the following: system priority, MAC address, key, port priority and port number. Refer to
for more information on this field.
Enabled Port
This field displays the trunk ID to identify a trunk group, that is, one logical link containing multiple ports.
Synchronized
Ports
These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group.
These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk group.
15.4 Link Aggregation Setup
Click Configuration in the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status screen to display the screen shown next. See
Section 15.1 on page 139 for more information on link aggregation.
Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 141
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 64 Link Aggregation: Configuration
142 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 36 Link Aggregation Control Protocol: Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).
System
Priority
Group ID
LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65,535. The switch with the lowest system priority (and lowest port number if system priority is the same) becomes the
LACP “server”. The LACP “server” controls the operation of LACP setup. Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregate Control Protocol
(LACP). The smaller the number, the higher the priority level.
The field identifies the link aggregation group, that is, one logical link containing multiple ports.
Active
Dynamic
(LACP)
Port
*
Select this option to activate a trunk group.
Select this check box to enable LACP for a trunk.
This field displays the port number.
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs.
LACP Timeout Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up. If a port does not respond after three tries, then it is deemed to be “down” and is removed from the trunk. Set a short timeout (one second) for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible.
Select either 1 second or 30 seconds.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 143
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
144 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 16
Port Authentication
This chapter describes the 802.1x authentication method and RADIUS server connection setup. See
Section 36.9 on page 293 for information on how to use the commands to configure
additional Radius server settings as well as multiple Radius server configuration.
16.1 Port Authentication Overview
IEEE 802.1x is an extended authentication protocol
2
that allows support of RADIUS (Remote
Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server.
16.1.1 RADIUS
RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) authentication is a popular protocol used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of (or in addition to) an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device. In essence,
RADIUS authentication allows you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location.
Figure 65 RADIUS Server
16.1.1.1 Vendor Specific Attribute
A Vendor Specific Attribute (VSA) is an attribute-value pair that is sent between a RADIUS server and the switch. Configure VSAs on the RADIUS server to set the switch to perform the following actions on an authenticated user:
• Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic
• Assign account privilege levels
2. At the time of writing, only Windows XP of the Microsoft operating systems supports it. See the Microsoft web site for information on other Windows operating system support. For other operating systems, see its documentation.
If your operating system does not support 802.1x, then you may need to install 802.1x client software.
Chapter 16 Port Authentication 145
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Note: Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure a VSA.
The following table describes the VSAs supported on the switch.
Table 37 Supported VSA
FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE
Ingress Bandwidth
Assignment
Vendor-Id = 890 (ZyXEL)
Vendor-Type = 1
Vendor-data = ingress rate (decimal)
Egress Bandwidth
Assignment
Vendor-Id = 890 (ZyXEL)
Vendor-Type = 2
Vendor-data = egress rate (decimal)
Privilege Assignment Vendor-ID = 890 (ZyXEL)
Vendor-Type = 3
Vendor-Data = " shell:priv-lvl= N" or
Vendor-ID = 9 (CISCO)
Vendor-Type = 1 (CISCO-AVPAIR)
Vendor-Data = " shell:priv-lvl= N" where N is a privilege level (from 0 to 14).
Note: If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server(s) and the switch, the user is assigned a privilege level from the database (RADIUS or local) the switch uses first for user authentication.
16.1.1.2 Tunnel Protocol Attribute
You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server to assign a port on the switch to a VLAN (fixed, untagged). This will also set the port’s VID. Refer to RFC 3580 for more information.
Table 38 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute
FUNCTION
VLAN Assignment
ATTRIBUTE
Tunnel-Type = VLAN(13)
Tunnel-Medium-Type = 802(6)
Tunnel-Private-Group-ID = VLAN ID
Note: You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the switch.
16.2 Port Authentication Configuration
To enable port authentication, first activate IEEE802.1x security (both on the switch and the port(s)) then configure the RADIUS server settings.
146 Chapter 16 Port Authentication
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Click Advanced Application , Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 66 Port Authentication
16.2.1 Configuring RADIUS Server Settings
Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings. See
for more information on RADIUS servers. From the Port Authentication screen, click RADIUS to display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 67 Port Authentication: RADIUS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 39 Port Authentication: RADIUS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Authentication Server
IP Address Enter the IP address of the external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation.
UDP Port
Shared Secret Specify a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the switch. This key is not sent over the network. This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the switch.
Apply
The default port of the RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 . You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so.
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Chapter 16 Port Authentication 147
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
16.2.2 Activate IEEE 802.1x Security
Use this screen to activate IEEE 802.1x security. From the Port Authentication screen, display the configuration screen as shown.
Figure 68 Port Authentication: 802.1x
148 Chapter 16 Port Authentication
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 40 Port Authentication: 802.1x
LABEL
Active
DESCRIPTION
Select this check box to permit 802.1x authentication on the switch.
Port
*
Note: You must first enable 802.1x authentication on the switch before configuring it on each port.
This field displays a port number.
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active Select this checkbox to permit 802.1x authentication on this port. You must first allow 802.1x authentication on the switch before configuring it on each port.
Reauthentication Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re-enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port.
Reauthentication
Timer
Specify how often a client has to re-enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Chapter 16 Port Authentication 149
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
150 Chapter 16 Port Authentication
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 17
Port Security
This chapter shows you how to set up port security.
17.1 About Port Security
Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and/or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the switch. The switch can learn up to 16K
MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed
16K.
For maximum port security, enable this feature, disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address(es) for a port. It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts. By default, MAC address learning is still enabled even though the port security is not activated.
17.2 Port Security Setup
Click Advanced Application , Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Chapter 17 Port Security 151
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 69 Port Security
152
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 41 Port Security
LABEL
Active
Port
DESCRIPTION
Select this option to enable port security on the switch.
This field displays a port number.
Chapter 17 Port Security
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 41 Port Security (continued)
LABEL
*
DESCRIPTION
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Active
Address
Learning
Limited Number of Learned MAC
Address
Apply
Cancel
Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port. The switch forwards packets whose MAC address(es) is in the MAC address table on this port.
Packets with no matching MAC address(es) are dropped.
Clear this check box to disable the port security feature. The switch forwards all packets on this port.
MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic. For MAC address learning to occur on a port, the port itself must be active with address learning enabled.
Use this field to limit the number of (dynamic) MAC addresses that may be learned on a port. For example, if you set this field to "5" on port 2, then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time. A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out. MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen. The valid range is from “0” to “254”. “0” means this feature is disabled.
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Chapter 17 Port Security 153
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
154 Chapter 17 Port Security
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 18
Classifier
This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the switch.
18.1 About the Classifier and QoS
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network's ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-on-demand.
A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming port number. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow.
Configure QoS on the switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Setting up QoS involves two separate steps:
1 Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
2 Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow (refer to
to configure policy rules).
18.2 Configuring the Classifier
Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers. After you define the classifier, you can specify actions (or policy) to act upon the traffic that matches the rules. To configure policy rules, refer to
Click Advanced Application and Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown.
Chapter 18 Classifier 155
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 70 Classifier
156
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 42 Classifier
LABEL
Active
Name
Packet
Format
DESCRIPTION
Select this option to enable this rule.
Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes.
Specify the format of the packet. Choices are All , 802.3 tagged , 802.3 untagged ,
Ethernet II tagged and Ethernet II untagged .
A value of 802.3
indicates that the packets are formatted according to the IEEE 802.3 standards.
A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894,
Ethernet II encapsulation.
Chapter 18 Classifier
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 42 Classifier (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Layer 2
Specify the fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier.
VLAN
Priority
Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and specify the source VLAN ID in the field provided.
Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a priority level in the field provided.
Ethernet
Type
Source
MAC
Address
Port
Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in hexadecimal value. Refer to
for information.
Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
To specify a source, select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs).
Type the port number to which the rule should be applied. You may choose one port only or all ports ( Any ).
Destination
MAC
Address
Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses.
To specify a destination, select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs).
Layer 3
Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier.
DSCP Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a
DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided.
IP
Protocol
Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in decimal value.
Refer to
for more information.
You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type. This means that the switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP connections.
Source
IP
Address/
Address
Prefix
Socket
Number
Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask.
Note: You must select either UDP or TCP you configure the socket numbers.
in the IP Protocol field before
Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP/UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP/UDP protocol port number.
Destination
IP
Address/
Address
Prefix
Socket
Number
Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask.
Note: You must select either UDP or TCP you configure the socket numbers.
in the IP Protocol field before
Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP/UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP/UDP protocol port number.
Chapter 18 Classifier 157
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 42 Classifier (continued)
LABEL
Add
Cancel
Clear
DESCRIPTION
Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below.
Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration.
Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.
18.3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration
To view a summary of the classifier configuration, scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen. To change the settings of a rule, click a number in the Index field.
Note: When two rules conflict with each other, a higher layer rule has priority over lower layer rule.
Figure 71 Classifier: Summary Table
158
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 43 Classifier: Summary Table
LABEL
Index
Active
Name
Rule
Delete
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
This field displays the index number of the rule. Click an index number to edit the rule.
This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated.
This field displays the descriptive name for this rule. This is for identification purpose only.
This field displays a summary of the classifier rule’s settings.
Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol number.
Table 44 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number
ETHERNET TYPE
IP ETHII
X.75 Internet
NBS Internet
PROTOCOL NUMBER
0800
0801
0802
Chapter 18 Classifier
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 44 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number
ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER
ECMA Internet 0803
Chaosnet 0804
X.25 Level 3
XNS Compat
0805
0807
Banyan Systems
BBN Simnet
IBM SNA
AppleTalk AARP
0BAD
5208
80D5
80F3
Some of the most common IP ports are:
Table 45 Common IP Ports
PORT NUMBER PORT NAME
21
23
25
53
80
110
FTP
Telnet
SMTP
DNS
HTTP
POP3
18.4 Classifier Example
The following figure shows an example where you configure a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC address 00:50:ba:ad:4f:81 on port 2.
Chapter 18 Classifier 159
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 72 Classifier: Example
160 Chapter 18 Classifier
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 19
Policy Rule
This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules.
19.1 Policy Rules Overview
A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria (refer to
for more information). A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network.
19.1.1 DiffServ
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow. Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points
(DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServcompliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.
19.1.2 DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new DS (Differentiated Services) field to replace the Type of Service
(TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-
DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.
DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits)
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies.
Chapter 19 Policy Rule 161
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
19.2 Configuring Policy Rules
You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen. Refer to
for more information.
Click Advanced Applications and then Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 73 Policy
162 Chapter 19 Policy Rule
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 46 Policy
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Name
Select this option to enable the policy.
Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes.
Classifier(s) This field displays the active classifier(s) you configure in the Classifier screen.
Select the classifier(s) to which this policy rule applies. To select more than one classifier, press [SHIFT] and select the choices at the same time.
Parameters
Set the fields below for this policy. You only have to set the field(s) that is related to the action(s) you configure in the Action field.
General
VLAN ID Specify a VLAN ID number.
Egress Port Type the number of an outgoing port.
Outgoing packet format for
Egress port
Select Tag to add the specified VID to packets on the specified outgoing port.
Otherwise, select Untag .
Priority
DSCP
TOS
Metering
Specify a priority level.
Specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63.
Specify the type of service (TOS) priority level.
You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow. Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated (in cases where the network is congested) is called out-of-profile traffic.
Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second (Kbps). Enter a number between 1 and
1000000.
Out-of-
Profile
DSCP
Specify a new DSCP number (between 0 and 63) if you want to replace or remark the
DSCP number for out-of-profile traffic.
Action
Specify the action(s) the switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow.
Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets.
Select Discard the packet to drop the packets.
Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before.
Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames.
Select Set the packet’s 802.1 priority to replace the packet’s 802.1 priority field with the value you set in the Priority field.
Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue.
Select Replace the 802.1 priority field with the IP TOS value to replace the packet’s 802.1 priority field with the value you set in the TOS field.
Chapter 19 Policy Rule 163
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 46 Policy (continued)
LABEL
Diffserv
Outgoing
Metering
Out-of-profile action
Add
Cancel
Clear
DESCRIPTION
Select No change to keep the TOS and/or DSCP fields in the packets.
Select Set the packet’s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure in the TOS field.
Select Replace the IP TOS with the 802.1 priority value to replace the TOS field with the value you configure in the Priority field.
Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field.
Select Send the packet to the mirror port to send the packet to the mirror port.
Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port.
Select Send the matching frames (broadcast or DLF, multicast, marked for dropping or to be sent to the CPU) to the egress port to send the broadcast, multicast, DLF, marked-to-drop or CPU frames to the egress port.
Select Set the packet’s VLAN ID to set the VLAN ID of the packet with the value you configure in the VLAN ID field.
Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow(s) then set the actions to be taken on out-of-profile packets.
Select the action(s) to be performed for out-of-profile traffic.
Select Drop the packet to discard the out-of-profile traffic.
Select Change the DSCP value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the Out of profile DSCP field.
Select Set Out-Drop Precedence to mark out-of-profile traffic and drop it when network is congested.
Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue the frames that are marked to be dropped.
Click Add to inset the entry to the summary table below.
Click Cancel to reset the fields back to your previous configuration.
Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults.
19.3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration
To view a summary of the classifier configuration, scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen. To change the settings of a rule, click a number in the Index field.
Figure 74 Policy: Summary Table
164 Chapter 19 Policy Rule
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 47 Policy: Summary Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index
Active
Name
This field displays the policy index number. Click an index number to edit the policy.
This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated.
This field displays the descriptive name for this policy. This is for identification purposes only.
Classifier(s) This field displays the name(s) of the classifier to which this policy applies.
Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
19.4 Policy Example
The figure below shows an example Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth and discard out-of-band traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier (refer to
).
Chapter 19 Policy Rule 165
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 75 Policy Example
166 Chapter 19 Policy Rule
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 20
Queuing Method
This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported.
20.1 Queuing Method Overview
Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion. Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic. See also
Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802.1p Priority in Port Setup for related information.
Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth.
20.1.1 Strictly Priority
Strictly Priority (SP) services queues based on priority only. As traffic comes into the switch, traffic on the highest priority queue, Q7 is transmitted first. When that queue empties, traffic on the next highest-priority queue, Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties, and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on. If higher priority queues never empty, then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent. SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements.
20.1.2 Weighted Fair Scheduling
Weighted Fair Scheduling is used to guarantee each queue's minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth weight (portion) (the number you configure in the Weight field - see Figure 18 1) when there is traffic congestion. WFS is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle. Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues. By default, the weight for Q0 is 1, for Q1 is 2, for Q2 is 3, and so on. Guaranteed bandwidth is calculated as follows:
Queue Weight
Total Queue Weight
x Port Speed
For example, using the default setting, Q0 on Port 1 gets a guaranteed bandwidth of:
1
1+2+3+4+5+6+7+8
x 100 Mbps = 3 Mbps
Chapter 20 Queuing Method 167
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
20.1.3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR)
Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle. A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port. This queue then moves to the back of the list. The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth, and then moves to the end of the list; and so on, depending on the number of queues being used. This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR) uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling, but services queues based on their priority and queue weight (the number you configure in the queue Weight field) rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth. WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle. Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights. This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied.
20.2 Configuring Queuing
Click Advanced Application , Queuing Method in the navigation panel.
168 Chapter 20 Queuing Method
Figure 76 Queuing Method
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 20 Queuing Method 169
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 48 Queuing Method
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Method Select Strictly Priority Queuing), WFQ (Weighted Fair Scheduling) or WRR
(Weighted Round Robin).
Strictly Priority services queues based on priority only. When the highest priority queue empties, traffic on the next highest-priority queue begins. Q7 has the highest priority and
Q0 the lowest.
Weighted Fair Scheduling is used to guarantee each queue's minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth portion (weight) (the number you configure in the Weight field). Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights.
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight (the number you configure in the queue Weight field). Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights.
FE Port
SPQ
Enable
This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR .
Select a queue ( Q0 to Q7 ) to have the switch use Strictly Priority to service the subsequent queue(s) after and including the specified queue for the 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports. For example, if you select Q5 , the switch services traffic on Q5 , Q6 and Q7 using
Strictly Priority .
Select None to always use WFQ or WRR for the 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports.
Port
*
This label shows the port you are configuring.
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Weight
GE Port
SPQ
Enable
Apply
Cancel
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here. Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights.
This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR .
Select a queue ( Q0 to Q7 ) to have the switch use Strictly Priority to service the subsequent queue(s) after and including the specified queue for the gigabit ports. For example, if you select Q5 , the switch services traffic on Q5 , Q6 and Q7 using Strictly
Priority .
Select None to always use WFQ or WRR for the gigabit ports.
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
170 Chapter 20 Queuing Method
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 21
VLAN Stacking
This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on your switch. See the chapter on
VLANs for more background information on Virtual LAN
21.1 VLAN Stacking Overview
A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers’
VLANs, even those with the same (customer-assigned) VLAN ID, within its network.
Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802.1Q tagged frames that enter the network. By tagging the tagged frames (“double-tagged” frames), the service provider can manage up to 4,094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4,094 customer VLANs. This allows a service provider to provide different service, based on specific VLANs, for many different customers.
A service provider’s customers may require a range of VLANs to handle multiple applications. A service provider’s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications. The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer.
Therefore, there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers, so traffic from different customers is kept separate.
21.1.1 VLAN Stacking Example
In the following example figure, both A and B are Service Provider’s Network (SPN) customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively. Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group. The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by adding tag 37 to distinguish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network.
Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 171
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 77 VLAN Stacking Example
21.2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles
Each port can have three VLAN stacking “roles”, Normal , Access Port and Tunnel (the latter is for Gigabit ports only).
• Select Normal for “regular” (non-VLAN stacking) IEEE 802.1Q frame switching.
• Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider's edge devices ( 1 and 2 in the
VLAN stacking example figure). The incoming frame is treated as "untagged", so a second VLAN tag (outer VLAN tag) can be added.
Note: Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose
Normal or Access Port .
• Select Tunnel Port (available for Gigabit ports only) for egress ports at the edge of the service provider's network. All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service provider's VLAN (using the outer VLAN tag defined by SP VID).
Note: Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose
Tunnel Port .
21.3 VLAN Tag Format
A VLAN tag (service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802.1Q) consists of the following three fields.
Table 49 VLAN Tag Format
Type Priority VID
172 Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Type is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802.1Q tag information. SP TPID (Service Provider Tag Protocol
Identifier) is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type.
Many vendors use 0x8100 or
0x9100.
TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier) is the customer IEEE 802.1Q tag.
• If the VLAN stacking port role is Access Port , then the switch adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider's edge devices (1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure).
• If the VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel Port , then the switch only adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider's edge devices (1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure) that have an SP TPID different to the one configured on the switch. (If an incoming frame’s SP TPID is the same as the one configured on the switch, then the switch will not add the tag.)
Priority refers to the IEEE 802.1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service (CoS) the customer has paid for.
• On the switch, configure priority level of inner IEEE 802.1Q tag in the Port Setup screen.
• "0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
VID is the VLAN ID. SP VID is the VID for the second (service provider’s) VLAN tag.
21.3.1 Frame Format
The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame, a single-tagged 802.1Q frame (customer) and a “double-tagged” 802.1Q frame (service provider) is shown next.
Configure the fields as circled in the switch VLAN Stacking screen.
Table 50 Single and Double Tagged 802.11Q Frame Format
DA
DA SA Len/Etype Data FCS Untagged
Ethernet frame
SA TPID Priority VID Len/Etype Data FCS IEEE 802.1Q customer tagged frame
DA SA SPTPID Priority VID TPID Priority VID Len/Etype Data FCS Double-tagged frame
Table 51 802.1Q Frame
DA
SA
Destination Address
Source Address
Priority 802.1p Priority
Len/Etype Length and type of Ethernet frame
(SP)TPID (Service Provider) Tag Protocol IDentifier Data
VID VLAN ID FCS
Frame data
Frame Check Sequence
Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 173
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
21.4 Configuring VLAN Stacking
Click Advanced Applications and then VLAN Stacking to display the screen as shown.
Figure 78 VLAN Stacking
174 Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 52 VLAN Stacking
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Active
Port
*
Select this checkbox to enable VLAN stacking on the switch.
SP TPID SP TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates whether the frame carries IEEE 802.1Q tag information. Choose 0x8100 or 0x9100 from the drop-down list box or select Others and then enter a four-digit hexadecimal number from 0x0000 to
0xFFFF. 0x denotes a hexadecimal number. It does not have to be typed in the Others text field.
The port number identifies the port you are configuring.
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Role
SPVID
Priority
Apply
Cancel
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Select Normal to have the switch ignore frames received (or transmitted) on this port with
VLAN stacking tags. Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority are ignored.
Select Access Port to have the switch add the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames received on this port. Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider's network.
Select Tunnel Port (available for Gigabit ports only) for egress ports at the edge of the service provider's network.
In order to support VLAN stacking on a port, the port must be able to allow frames of 1526
Bytes (1522 Bytes + 4 Bytes for the second tag) to pass through it.
SPVID is the service provider’s VLAN ID (the outer VLAN tag). Enter the service provider ID
(from 1 to 4094) for frames received on this port. See Chapter 8 on page 93
for more background information on VLAN ID.
On the switch, configure priority level of inner IEEE 802.1Q tag in the Port Setup screen.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh.
Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking 175
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
176 Chapter 21 VLAN Stacking
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 22
Multicast
This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features.
22.1 Multicast Overview
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender to 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. Refer to RFC 1112 and
RFC 2236 for information on IGMP versions 1 and 2 respectively.
22.1.1 IP Multicast Addresses
In IPv4, a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts
(multicast group) in a different subnetwork. A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group, not individual receiving devices. IP addresses in the Class D range (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) are used for IP multicasting. Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by
IANA for special purposes (see the IANA web site for more information).
22.1.2 IGMP Filtering
With the IGMP filtering feature, you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join. This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services (such as content information distribution) based on service plans and types of subscription.
You can set the switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per-port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port.
22.1.3 IGMP Snooping
A switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query, Report and Leave (IGMP version 2) packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership. It checks IGMP packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and configures multicasting accordingly. IGMP snooping allows the switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them.
Chapter 22 Multicast 177
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups (that it has learned from
IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured) to ports that are members of that group. IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your switch.
22.2 Multicast Status
Click Advanced Applications and Multicast to display the screen as shown. This screen shows the multicast group information. See
Section 22.1 on page 177 for more information on
multicasting.
Figure 79 Multicast Status.
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 53 Multicast Status
LABEL
Index
VID
Port
Multicast Group
DESCRIPTION
This is the index number of the entry.
This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.
This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group.
This field displays IP multicast group addresses.
22.3 Multicast Setting
Click Advanced Applications , Multicast and the Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown. See
for more information on multicasting.
178 Chapter 22 Multicast
Figure 80 Multicast Setting
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Multicast 179
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 54 Multicast Setting
LABEL
IGMP Snooping
Active
Host Timeout
Leave Timeout
802.1p Priority
IGMP Filtering
Unknown
Multicast Frame
Reserved
Multicast Group
Port
*
DESCRIPTION
Use this settings to configure IGMP Snooping.
Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group.
Specify the time (from 1 to 16,711,450) in seconds that elapses before the switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port.
Enter an IGMP leave timeout value (from 1 to 16,711,450) in seconds. This defines how many seconds the switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received from a host.
Select a priority level (0-7) to which the switch changes the priority in outgoing
IGMP control packets. Otherwise, select No-Change to not replace the priority.
Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join.
Specify the action to perform when the switch receives an unknown multicast frame. Select Drop to discard the frame(s). Select Flooding to send the frame(s) to all ports.
Multicast addresses (224.0.0.0 to 224.0.0.255) are reserved for the local scope.
For examples, 224.0.0.1 is for all hosts in this subnet, 224.0.0.2 is for all multicast routers in this subnet, etc. A router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range. See the IANA web site for more information.
Specify the action to perform when the switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast address. Select Drop to discard the frame(s). Select Flooding to send the frame(s) to all ports.
This field displays the port number.
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Immed. Leave Select this option to set the switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port.
Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port.
Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join.
Max Group Num.
Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join. Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups, any new IGMP join report frame(s) is dropped on this port.
IGMP Filtering
Profile
Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port. Otherwise, select
Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group.
180 Chapter 22 Multicast
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 54 Multicast Setting (continued)
LABEL
IGMP Querier
Mode
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
The switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router (or server). The switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port.
Select Auto to have the switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets.
Select Fixed to have the switch always use the port as an IGMP query port. Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port.
Select Edge to stop the switch from using the port as an IGMP query port. The switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port. The switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port.
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
22.4 IGMP Filtering Profile
IGMP filter profiles allow you to control access to IGMP multicast groups. This allows you to have a service available to a specific IGMP multicast group. You can configure an IGMP filter profile for an IGMP multicast group that has access to a service (like a SIP server for example). Within a profile, configure an IGMP filter to specify the multicast IP address ranges. Then assign the IGMP filter profile to the ports (in the Multicast Setting screen) that are allowed to use the service.
Click Advanced Applications and Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the Multicast
Setting link and then the IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown.
Chapter 22 Multicast 181
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 81 Multicast: IGMP Filtering Profile
182
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 55 Multicast: IGMP Filtering Profile
LABEL
Profile Name
Start Address
End Address
Add
Clear
Profile Name
Start Address
End Address
Delete
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes.
To configure additional rule(s) for a profile that you have already added, enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range.
Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile.
Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile.
If you want to add a single multicast IP address, enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields.
Click Add to save the settings to the switch.
Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults.
This field displays the descriptive name of the profile.
This field displays the start of the multicast address range.
This field displays the end of the multicast address range.
To delete the profile(s) and all the accompanying rules, select the profile(s) that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column, then click the Delete button.
To delete a rule(s) from a profile, select the rule(s) that you want to remove in the
Delete Rule column, then click the Delete button.
Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile / Delete Rule check boxes.
Chapter 22 Multicast
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
22.5 MVR Overview
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is designed for applications (such as Media-on-Demand
(MoD)) that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring-based service provider network.
MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network. While isolated in different subscriber VLANs, connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN. This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management.
You must enable IGMP snooping to use MVR. However, MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR. Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping.
The following figure shows a network example. The subscriber VLAN ( 1 , 2 and 3 ) information is hidden from the streaming media server, S . In addition, the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the switch and S .
Figure 82 MVR Network Example
22.5.1 Types of MVR Ports
In MVR, a source port is a port on the switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast data. Once configured, the switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group.
22.5.2 MVR Modes
You can set your switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode.
In dynamic mode, the switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices
(such as multicast routers or servers) in the multicast VLAN. This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports.
In compatible mode, the switch does not send any IGMP reports. In this case, you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN.
Chapter 22 Multicast 183
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
22.5.3 How MVR Works
The following figure shows a multicast television example where a subscriber device (such as a computer) in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server, S , via the switch. Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the switch.
When the subscriber selects a television channel, computer A sends an IGMP report to the switch to join the appropriate multicast group. If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the switch, an entry is created in the forwarding table on the switch. This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic.
When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer, an IGMP leave message is sent to the switch to leave the multicast group. The switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port (in this case, a DSL port on the switch). If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN, the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic. Otherwise, the switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table.
Figure 83 MVR Multicast Television Example
22.6 General MVR Configuration
Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port(s) and a source port for each multicast VLAN. Click Advanced Applications and Multicast in the navigation panel. Click the Multicast Setting link and then the MVR link to display the screen as shown next.
Note: You can create up to three multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the switch.
Your switch automatically creates a static VLAN (with the same VID) when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen.
184 Chapter 22 Multicast
Figure 84 MVR
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Multicast 185
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the related labels in this screen.
Table 56 MVR
LABEL
Active
Name
DESCRIPTION
Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
Enter the VLAN ID (1 to 4094) of the multicast VLAN. Multicast VLAN
ID
802.1p Priority
Mode
Port
*
Select a priority level (0-7) with which the switch replaces the priority in outgoing
IGMP control packets (belonging to this multicast VLAN).
Specify the MVR mode on the switch. Choices are Dynamic and Compatible .
Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast
VLAN.
Select Compatible to set the switch not to send IGMP reports.
This field displays the port number on the switch.
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Source Port
Receiver Port
None
Tagging
Add
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic. All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN.
Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic.
Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR. No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port.
Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted.
Click Add to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
VLAN
Active
Name
Mode
Source Port
Receiver Port
802.1p
Delete
Cancel
This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.
This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not.
This field displays the descriptive name for this setting.
This field displays the MVR mode.
This field displays the source port number(s).
This field displays the receiver port number(s).
This field displays the priority level.
To delete a multicast VLAN(s), select the rule(s) that you want to remove in the
Delete column, then click the Delete button.
Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
186 Chapter 22 Multicast
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
22.7 MVR Group Configuration
All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group.
Configure MVR IP multicast group address(es) in the Group Configuration screen. Click
Group Configuration in the MVR screen.
Note: A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN. However, IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap.
Figure 85 MVR: Group Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 57 MVR: Group Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Multicast
VLAN ID
Name
Select a multicast VLAN ID (that you configured in the MVR screen) from the dropdown list box.
Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes.
Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation.
Refer to Section 22.1.1 on page 177 for more information on IP multicast addresses.
End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation.
Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one
IP address for a multicast group.
Refer to Section 22.1.1 on page 177 for more information on IP multicast addresses.
Add Click Add to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Chapter 22 Multicast 187
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 57 MVR: Group Configuration
LABEL DESCRIPTION
MVLAN
Name
This field displays the multicast VLAN ID.
This field displays the descriptive name for this setting.
Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group.
End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group.
Delete Select and click Delete to remove the selected entry(ies) from the table.
22.7.1 MVR Configuration Example
The following figure shows a network example where ports 1, 2 and 3 on the switch belong to
VLAN 1. In addition, port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic (the News and Movie channels) from the remote streaming media server, S . Computers
A , B and C in VLAN are able to receive the traffic.
Figure 86 MVR Configuration Example
To configure the MVR settings on the switch, create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports.
188 Chapter 22 Multicast
Figure 87 MVR Configuration Example
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
To set the switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers, configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen. The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups ( News and Movie ) are configured for the multicast VLAN 200.
Chapter 22 Multicast 189
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 88 MVR Group Configuration Example
Figure 89 MVR Group Configuration Example
190 Chapter 22 Multicast
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 23
DHCP Relay
This chapter shows you how to set up DHCP relay.
23.1 DHCP Relay Overview
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a DHCP server. You can configure the switch to relay client DHCP requests to a DHCP server and the server's responses back to the clients.
23.1.1 DHCP Relay Agent Information
The switch can add information to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server. This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests. You can also specify additional information for the switch to add to the client DHCP requests that it relays to the DHCP server. Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details.
The DHCP relay agent information feature adds an Agent Information field to the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client TCP/IP configuration request frames that the switch relays to a DHCP server. The following lists the DHCP relay agent option 82 information that the switch sends to the DHCP server:
• Slot ID (1 byte)
• Port ID (1 byte)
• VLAN ID (2 bytes)
• System name (up to 32 bytes, this is optional).
23.2 DHCP Relay Configuration
To configure DHCP relay information and specify the DHCP server(s), click Advanced
Application and DHCP Relay to display the screen as shown next.
Chapter 23 DHCP Relay 191
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 90 DHCP Relay
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 58 DHCP Relay
LABEL
Active
Remote DHCP
Server 1 ~ 3
Relay Agent
Information
Information
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Select this check box to enable DHCP relay.
Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation.
Select the Option 82 check box to have the switch add information (slot number, port number and VLAN ID) to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
This read-only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen.
Select the check box for the switch to add the system name to the DHCP client
DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server.
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
192 Chapter 23 DHCP Relay
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 24
Static Route
This chapter shows you how to configure static routes.
24.1 Configuring Static Route
Static routes tell the switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP/IP parameters manually.
Click IP Application , Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Figure 91 Static Routing
The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route.
Table 59 Static Routing
LABEL
Active
Name
DESCRIPTION
This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 10 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
Chapter 24 Static Route 193
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 59 Static Routing (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Destination IP
Address
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID.
IP Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination.
Gateway IP
Address
Metric
Add
Cancel
Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your switch that will forward the packet to the destination. The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your switch.
The metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.
Click Add to save your static route to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch discards this route if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Index
Active
Name
Destination
Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Address
Metric
Delete
Cancel
This field displays the index number of the route. Click a number to edit the static route entry.
This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated.
This field displays the descriptive name for this route. This is for identification purpose only.
This field displays the IP network address of the final destination.
This field displays the subnet mask for this destination.
This field displays the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your switch that will forward the packet to the destination.
This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes.
Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table.
Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes.
194 Chapter 24 Static Route
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 25
DiffServ Code Point
This chapter shows you how to set up Diffserv Code Point (DSCP) on each port and how to convert DSCP values to IEEE 802.1p values.
25.1 DiffServ Overview
DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) is a field used for packet classification on DiffServ networks.
The higher the value, the higher the priority. Lower-priority packets may be dropped if the total traffic exceeds the capacity of the network.
25.2 Enable DiffServ
Click IP Application , DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Chapter 25 DiffServ Code Point 195
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 92 DiffServ
196 Chapter 25 DiffServ Code Point
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route.
Table 60 Static Routing
LABEL DESCRIPTION
DSCP Setting Click DSCP Map to open the screen where you can set up the mapping between source DSCP priority and IEEE 802.1p priority.
Active
Port
*
This field allows you to activate/deactivate DiffServ on the switch.
This read-only index number indicates which port you are activating.
Settings in this row apply to all ports.
Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports. Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port-by-port basis.
Active
Apply
Cancel
Note: Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them.
This allows you to activate DiffServ on a per port basis.
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
25.3 Configure DSCP Setting
Use this screen to convert DSCP priority to IEEE 802.1p priority. Click IP Application ,
DiffServ, DSCP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown.
Chapter 25 DiffServ Code Point 197
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 93 DiffServ
The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route.
Table 61 Static Routing
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Diffserv
DSCP to
802.1p
Mapping
Click this to return to the main DiffServ screen.
In this section you map each DSCP value with an 802.1p value in the drop down list box.
0-63 This field displays each DSCP value.
802.1p Priority Use the drop down list box to select the IEEE 802.1p priority (0 to 7) to which you would like to map this DSCP value.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
198 Chapter 25 DiffServ Code Point
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 26
Maintenance
This chapter explains how to configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files.
26.1 The Maintenance Screen
Click Management , Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen.
Figure 94 Maintenance
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 62 Maintenance
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Current This field displays which configuration ( Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 ) is currently operating on the switch.
Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen.
Firmware
Upgrade
Restore
Configuration
Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen.
Backup
Configuration
Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen.
Load Factory
Default
Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the factory default settings.
Chapter 26 Maintenance 199
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 62 Maintenance (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Save
Configuration
Reboot
System
Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 1 on the switch.
Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the switch.
Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the switch.
Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the switch.
Note: Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the switch.
26.2 Load Factory Default
Follow the steps below to reset the switch back to the factory defaults.
1 In the Maintenance screen, click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Defaults to clear all switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults.
2 The following message appears. Click OK to reset all switch configurations to the factory defaults.
Figure 95 Load Factory Default: Start
3 Enter the user name and password to log in the web configurator again. Click OK .
Figure 96 Load Factory Default: Start
200
4 The following message appears. Click Yes to close this window.
Chapter 26 Maintenance
Figure 97 Close Browser after Load Factory Defaults
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
5 You may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default switch IP address (192.168.1.1).
26.3 Save Configuration
Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the switch.
Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the switch.
Alternatively, click Save on the top right-hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes to the current configuration.
Note: Note: Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently.
All unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the switch.
26.4 Reboot System
Reboot System allows you to restart the switch without physically turning the power off. It also allows you to load configuration one ( Config 1 ) or configuration two ( Config 2 ) when you reboot. Follow the steps below to reboot the switch.
1 In the Maintenance screen, click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one. The following screen displays.
Figure 98 Reboot System: Confirmation
2 Click OK again and then wait for the switch to restart. This takes up to two minutes. This does not affect the switch’s configuration.
Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the switch.
Chapter 26 Maintenance 201
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
26.5 Firmware Upgrade
Make sure you have downloaded (and unzipped) the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device.
Note: Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device.
From the Maintenance screen, display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next.
Figure 99 Firmware Upgrade
Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the switch in the File
Path text box or click Browse to locate it. After you have specified the file, click Upgrade .
After the firmware upgrade process is complete, see the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number.
26.6 Restore a Configuration File
Restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the switch using the Restore
Configuration screen.
202 Chapter 26 Maintenance
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 100 Restore Configuration
Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display the Choose File screen (below) from which you can locate it.
After you have specified the file, click Restore . "config" is the name of the configuration file on the switch, so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen.
26.7 Backup a Configuration File
Backing up your switch configurations allows you to create various “snapshots” of your device from which you may restore at a later date.
Back up your current switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen.
Figure 101 Backup Configuration
Follow the steps below to back up the current switch configuration to your computer in this screen.
1 Click Backup .
2 Click Save to display the Save As screen.
3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop-down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box. Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer.
Chapter 26 Maintenance 203
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
26.8 FTP Command Line
This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the switch using
FTP commands. First, understand the filename conventions.
26.8.1 Filename Conventions
The configuration file (also known as the romfile or ROM) contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password, switch setup, IP Setup, etc. Once you have customized the switch's settings, they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing.
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System, sometimes referred to as the “ras” file) is the system firmware and has a “bin” filename extension.
Table 63 Filename Conventions
FILE TYPE
INTERNAL
NAME
Configuration File config
Firmware ras
EXTERNAL
NAME
DESCRIPTION
*.bin
This is the configuration filename on the switch.
Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system, including your switch configurations, system-related data (including the default password), the error log and the trace log.
This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the switch.
26.8.1.1 Example FTP Commands
ftp> put firmware.bin ras
This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file "firmware.bin" to the switch.
ftp> get config config.cfg
This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called “config.cfg” on your computer.
If your (T)FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different from the source, you will need to rename them as the switch only recognizes “config” and “ras”. Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use.
Note: Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device.
26.8.2 FTP Command Line Procedure
1 Launch the FTP client on your computer.
204 Chapter 26 Maintenance
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
2 Enter open , followed by a space and the IP address of your switch.
3 Press [ENTER] when prompted for a username.
4 Enter your password as requested (the default is “1234”).
5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary.
6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the switch, for example, put firmware.bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer (firmware.bin) to the switch and renames it to “ras”. Similarly, put config.cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer (config.cfg) to the switch and renames it to “config”.
Likewise get config config.cfg
transfers the configuration file on the switch to your computer and renames it to “config.cfg”. See
information on filename conventions.
7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt.
26.8.3 GUI-based FTP Clients
The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI-based FTP clients.
Table 64 General Commands for GUI-based FTP Clients
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Host Address
Login Type
Transfer Type
Enter the address of the host server.
Anonymous.
This is when a user I.D. and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access. Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option.
Normal.
The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login.
Transfer files in either ASCII (plain text format) or in binary mode.
Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode.
Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory (path).
Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory (path).
26.8.4 FTP Restrictions
FTP will not work when:
• FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen.
• The IP address(es) in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the switch will disconnect the Telnet session immediately.
Chapter 26 Maintenance 205
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
206 Chapter 26 Maintenance
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 27
Access Control
This chapter describes how to control access to the switch.
27.1 Access Control Overview
A console port and FTP are allowed one session each, Telnet and SSH share four sessions, up to five Web sessions (five different usernames and passwords) and/or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed.
Table 65 Access Control Overview
Console Port
One session
SSH Telnet
Share up to four sessions
FTP
One session
Web SNMP
Up to five accounts No limit
A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi-login is disabled. See
Section 34.11.2 on page 249 for more information on disabling
multi-login.
27.2 The Access Control Main Screen
Click Management , Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown.
Figure 102 Access Control
Chapter 27 Access Control 207
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
27.3 About SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP/IP-based devices. SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system (NMS) and a network element (NE). A manager station can manage and monitor the switch through the network via SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and/or SNMP version 2c. The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. SNMP is only available if TCP/IP is configured.
Figure 103 SNMP Management Model
208
An SNMP managed network consists of two main components: agents and a manager.
An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed switch (the switch). An agent translates the local management information from the managed switch into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices.
The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a switch. Examples of variables include such as number of packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects.
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol based on the manager/agent model. The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations:
Table 66 SNMP Commands
COMMAND
Get
GetNext
DESCRIPTION
Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent.
Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent. In SNMPv1, when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent, it initiates a Get operation, followed by a series of GetNext operations.
Chapter 27 Access Control
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 66 SNMP Commands
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
Set
Trap
Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent.
Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events.
27.3.1 Supported MIBs
MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance.
The switch supports the following MIBs:
• SNMP MIB II (RFC 1213)
• RFC 1157 SNMP v1
• RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs
• RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs
• RFC 1155 SMI
• RFC 2674 SNMPv2, SNMPv2c
• RFC 1757 RMON
• SNMPv2, SNMPv2c or later version, compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP,
RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP, RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP
27.3.2 SNMP Traps
The switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs. SNMP traps supported are outlined in the following table.
Table 67 SNMP Traps
OBJECT ID OBJECT LABEL
SNMPv2 Traps
Cold Start
WarmStart linkDown linkUp authenticationFailure
DESCRIPTION
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 This trap is sent when the switch is turned on.
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 This trap is sent when the switch restarts.
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down.
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up.
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 This trap is sent when an SNMP request comes from non-authenticated hosts.
RFC 1493 Traps newRoot topology change
1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes.
1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2 This trap is sent when the STP root topology changes.
Chapter 27 Access Control 209
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
27.3.3 Configuring SNMP
From the Access Control screen, display the SNMP screen. You can click Access Control to go back to the Access Control screen.
Figure 104 Access Control: SNMP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 68 Access Control: SNMP
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Get Community Enter the get community, which is the password for the incoming Get- and GetNext- requests from the management station.
Set Community Enter the set community, which is the password for incoming Set- requests from the management station.
Trap Community Enter the trap community, which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager.
Trap Destination Enter the IP addresses of up to four stations to send your SNMP traps to.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
27.3.4 Setting Up Login Accounts
Up to five people (one administrator and four non-administrators) may access the switch via web configurator at any one time.
• An administrator is someone who can both view and configure switch changes. The username for the Administrator is always admin . The default administrator password is
1234 .
210 Chapter 27 Access Control
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Note: It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password
( 1234 ).
• A non-administrator (username is something other than admin ) is someone who can view but not configure switch settings.
Click Access Control from the navigation panel and then click Logins from this screen.
Figure 105 Access Control: Logins
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 69 Access Control: Logins
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Administrator
This is the default administrator account with the “admin” user name. You cannot change the default administrator user name. Only the administrator has read/write access.
Old Password Type the existing system password ( 1234 is the default password when shipped).
New Password Enter your new system password.
Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation
Edit Logins
You may configure passwords for up to four users. These users have read-only access. You can give users higher privileges via the CLI. For more information on assigning privileges see
.
User Name
Password
Set a user name (up to 32 ASCII characters
Enter your new system password. long).
Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation
Chapter 27 Access Control 211
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 69 Access Control: Logins (continued)
LABEL
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
27.4 SSH Overview
Unlike Telnet or FTP, which transmit data in clear text, SSH (Secure Shell) is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network.
Figure 106 SSH Communication Example
27.5 How SSH works
The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts.
212 Chapter 27 Access Control
Figure 107 How SSH Works
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
1 Host Identification
The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server. The server identifies itself with a host key. The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server.
The client automatically saves any new server public keys. In subsequent connections, the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer.
2 Encryption Method
Once the identification is verified, both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use.
3 Authentication and Data Transmission
After the identification is verified and data encryption activated, a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server. The client then sends its authentication information (user name and password) to the server to log in to the server.
27.6 SSH Implementation on the Switch
Your switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods
(DES, 3DES and Blowfish). The SSH server is implemented on the switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22. Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time.
Chapter 27 Access Control 213
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
27.6.1 Requirements for Using SSH
You must install an SSH client program on a client computer (Windows or Linux operating system) that is used to connect to the switch over SSH.
27.7 Introduction to HTTPS
HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL) is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages. Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is an applicationlevel protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality (an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data), authentication (one party can identify the other party) and data integrity (you know if data has been changed).
It relies upon certificates, public keys, and private keys.
HTTPS on the switch is used so that you may securely access the switch using the web configurator. The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server (the switch) must always authenticate itself to the SSL client (the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the switch), whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so. Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSLclient must send the switch a certificate. You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a CA that is a trusted CA on the switch.
Please refer to the following figure.
1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL-aware web browser go to port 443 (by default) on the switch’s WS (web server).
2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 (by default) on the switch’s
WS (web server).
Figure 108 HTTPS Implementation
214
Note: If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen, then the switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts.
Chapter 27 Access Control
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
27.8 HTTPS Example
If you haven’t changed the default HTTPS port on the switch, then in your browser enter
“https://switch IP Address/” as the web site address where “switch IP Address” is the IP address or domain name of the switch you wish to access.
27.8.1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the switch HTTPS server, a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate. Click View Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the switch.
You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer. Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen; if you select No , then web configurator access is blocked.
Figure 109 Security Alert Dialog Box (Internet Explorer)
27.8.2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages
When you attempt to access the switch HTTPS server, a Website Certified by an Unknown
Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate. Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the switch.
If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected, then click OK to continue in Netscape.
Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the switch’s certificate into the SSL client.
Chapter 27 Access Control 215
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 110 Security Certificate 1 (Netscape)
Figure 111 Security Certificate 2 (Netscape)
27.8.3 The Main Screen
After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password, the switch main screen appears. The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection.
216 Chapter 27 Access Control
Figure 112 Example: Lock Denoting a Secure Connection
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
27.9 Service Port Access Control
Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the switch.
You may also change the default service port and configure “trusted computer(s)” for each service in the Remote Management screen (discussed later). Click Access Control to go back to the main Access Control screen.
Chapter 27 Access Control 217
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 113 Access Control: Service Access Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 70 Access Control: Service Access Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Services
Active
Service Port For Telnet, SSH, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS services, you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field. If you change the default port number then you will have to let people (who wish to use the service) know the new port number for that service.
Timeout Type how many minutes a management session (via the web configurator) can be left idle before the session times out. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks.
Apply
Services you may use to access the switch are listed here.
Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the switch.
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
27.10 Remote Management
From the Access Control screen, display the Remote Management screen as shown next.
You can specify a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an administrator may use a service to manage the switch. Click Access Control to return to the Access Control screen.
218 Chapter 27 Access Control
Figure 114 Access Control: Remote Management
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 71 Access Control: Remote Management
LABEL
Entry
Active
Start Address
End Address
Telnet/FTP/
HTTP/ICMP/
SNMP/SSH/
HTTPS
Apply
DESCRIPTION
This is the client set index number. A “client set” is a group of one or more “trusted computers” from which an administrator may use a service to manage the switch.
Select this check box to activate this secured client set. Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it.
Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this switch.
The switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here. The switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match.
Select services that may be used for managing the switch from the specified trusted computers.
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Chapter 27 Access Control 219
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
220 Chapter 27 Access Control
This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen.
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 28
Diagnostic
28.1 Diagnostic
Click Management , Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen. Use this screen to check system logs, ping IP addresses or perform port tests.
Figure 115 Diagnostic
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 72 Diagnostic
LABEL DESCRIPTION
System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi-line text box.
Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry.
IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection.
Click Ping to have the switch ping the IP address (in the field to the left).
Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test.
Chapter 28 Diagnostic 221
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
222 Chapter 28 Diagnostic
This chapter explains the syslog screens.
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 29
Syslog
29.1 Syslog Overview
The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level.
The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels.
Table 73 Syslog Severity Levels
CODE
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
SEVERITY
Emergency: The system is unusable.
Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
Critical: The system condition is critical.
Error: There is an error condition on the system.
Warning: There is a warning condition on the system.
Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system.
Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.
Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.
29.2 Syslog Setup
Click Management and then Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen. The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server. Use this screen to configure the device’s system logging settings.
Chapter 29 Syslog 223
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 116 Syslog
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 74 Syslog
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Syslog
Logging Type
Active
Facility
Select Active to turn on syslog (system logging) and then configure the syslog setting
This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate.
Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category.
The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
29.3 Syslog Server Setup
Click Management and then Syslog in the navigation panel to display the Syslog Setup screen. Click the Syslog Server Setup link to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers.
224 Chapter 29 Syslog
Figure 117 Syslog: Server Setup
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 75 Syslog: Server Setup
LABEL
Active
Server Address
Log Level
Add
Cancel
Clear
Index
Active
IP Address
Log Level
Delete
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server. Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it (you can edit the entry later).
Enter the IP address of the syslog server.
Select the severity level(s) of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server. The lower the number, the more critical the logs are.
Click Add to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults.
This is the index number of a syslog server entry. Click this number to edit the entry.
This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server. No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server.
This field displays the IP address of the syslog server.
This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server.
Select an entry’s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Chapter 29 Syslog 225
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
226 Chapter 29 Syslog
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 30
Cluster Management
This chapter introduces cluster management.
30.1 Cluster Management Status Overview
Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one switch, called the cluster manager. The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another.
Table 76 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications
Maximum number of cluster members 24
Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation.
Cluster Manager
Cluster Members
The switch through which you manage the cluster member switches.
The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch.
In the following example, switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members.
Chapter 30 Cluster Management 227
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 118 Clustering Application Example
30.2 Cluster Management Status
Click Management , Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen.
Note: A cluster can only have one manager.
228 Chapter 30 Cluster Management
Figure 119 Cluster Management: Status
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 77 Cluster Management: Status
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Status This field displays the role of this switch within the cluster.
Manager
Member (you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager)
None (neither a manager nor a member of a cluster)
This field displays the cluster manager switch’s hardware MAC address.
Manager
The Number of
Member
This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster. The following fields describe the cluster member switches.
Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch. Each number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch’s web configurator (see
MacAddr
Name
Model
Status
This is the cluster member switch’s hardware MAC address.
This is the cluster member switch’s System Name .
This field displays the model name.
This field displays:
Online (the cluster member switch is accessible)
Error (for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list, etc.)
Offline (the switch is disconnected - Offline shows approximately 1.5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down)
30.2.1 Cluster Member Switch Management
Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch's web configurator home page. This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you'd see if you accessed it directly are different.
Chapter 30 Cluster Management 229
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 120 Cluster Management: Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen
30.2.1.1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example.
230 Chapter 30 Cluster Management
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 121 Example: Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch
C:\>ftp 192.168.1.1
Connected to 192.168.1.1.
220 switch FTP version 1.0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00:58:46 1970
User (192.168.0.1:(none)): admin
331 Enter PASS command
Password:
230 Logged in ftp> ls
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for LIST
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 3042210 Jul 01 12:00 ras
-rw-rw-rw- 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12:00 config
--w--w--w- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
-rw-rw-rw- 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12:00 config-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
226 File sent OK ftp: 297 bytes received in 0.00Seconds 297000.00Kbytes/sec.
ftp> bin
200 Type I OK ftp> put 370lt0.bin fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
200 Port command okay
150 Opening data connection for STOR fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46
226 File received OK ftp: 262144 bytes sent in 0.63Seconds 415.44Kbytes/sec.
ftp>
The following table explains some of the FTP parameters.
Table 78 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example
FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
User
Password ls
360lt0.bin
Enter “admin”.
The web configurator password default is 1234.
Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch’s firmware and configuration file.
This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch.
fw-00-a0-c5-01-23-46 This is the cluster member switch’s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch.
config-00-a0-c5-01-23-46 This is the cluster member switch’s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch.
30.3 Clustering Management Configuration
Use this screen to configure clustering management. Click Configuration from the Cluster
Management screen to display the next screen.
Chapter 30 Cluster Management 231
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 122 Clustering Management Configuration
232
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 79 Clustering Management Configuration
LABEL
Clustering Manager
Active
Name
VID
DESCRIPTION
Select Active to have this switch become the cluster manager switch. A cluster can only have one manager. Other (directly connected) switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list. If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager, then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management
Status screen and a warning icon ( ) appears in the member summary list below.
Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager. You may use up to 32 printable characters (spaces are allowed).
This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the switch is set to 802.1Q VLAN.
All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster. Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list. This field is ignored if the Clustering
Manager is using Port-based VLAN.
Chapter 30 Cluster Management
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 79 Clustering Management Configuration (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Apply
Cancel
Clustering
Candidate
List
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members.
Password
A list of suitable candidates found by auto-discovery is shown here. The switches must be directly connected. Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list.
Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list.
Each cluster member’s password is its web configurator password. Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password. If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards, then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager . Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon ( ) appears in the member summary list below.
If multiple devices have the same password then hold [SHIFT] and click those switches to select them. Then enter their common web configurator password.
Add
Cancel
Click Add to save this part of the screen to the switch.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto-discovery again to list potential cluster members.
The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured.
Index
MacAddr
Name
Model
Remove
Cancel
This is the index number of a cluster member switch.
This is the cluster member switch’s hardware MAC address.
This is the cluster member switch’s System Name
This is the cluster member switch’s model name.
.
Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster.
Click Cancel to reset the fields.
Chapter 30 Cluster Management 233
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
234 Chapter 30 Cluster Management
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 31
MAC Table
This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen.
31.1 MAC Table Overview
The MAC Table screen (a MAC table is also known as a filtering database) shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the switch’s ports. It shows what device MAC address, belonging to what VLAN group (if any) is forwarded to which port(s) and whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the switch) or static (manually entered in the Static MAC
Forwarding screen).
The switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames. See the following figure.
1 The switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came.
2 The switch checks to see if the frame's destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table.
• If the switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, then it forwards the frame to that port.
• If the switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address, then the frame is flooded to all ports. Too much port flooding leads to network congestion.
• If the switch has already learned the port for this MAC address, but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on, then it filters the frame.
Figure 123 MAC Table Flowchart
Chapter 31 MAC Table 235
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
31.2 Viewing the MAC Table
Click Management , MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen.
Figure 124 MAC Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 80 MAC Table
LABEL
Sort by
MAC
DESCRIPTION
Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type. The information is then displayed in the summary table below.
Click this button to display and arrange the data according to MAC address.
VID
Port
Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group.
Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number.
Index This is the incoming frame index number.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came.
VID
Port
Type
This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs.
This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned.
This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the switch) or
(manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
static
236 Chapter 31 MAC Table
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 32
ARP Table
This chapter introduces ARP Table.
32.1 ARP Table Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are 48 bits long. The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
32.1.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the switch, the switch's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the
LAN. The switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the switch puts all ones in the target MAC field (FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine. ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied.
32.2 Viewing the ARP Table
Click Management , ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen. Use the
ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s).
Chapter 32 ARP Table 237
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 125 ARP Table
238
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 81 ARP Table
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Index
IP Address
This is the ARP Table entry number.
This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a switch port with corresponding MAC address below.
MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with corresponding IP address above.
Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic (learned by the switch) or static
(manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen).
Chapter 32 ARP Table
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 33
Configure Clone
This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports.
33.1 Configure Clone
Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports. Click Management , Configure Clone to open the following screen.
Figure 126 Configure Clone
Chapter 33 Configure Clone 239
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 82 Configure Clone
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Source/
Destination
Port
Enter the source port under the Source label. This port’s attributes are copied.
Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label. These are the ports which are going to have the same attributes as the source port. You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash.
Example:
• 2, 4, 6 indicates that ports 2, 4 and 6 are the destination ports.
• 2-6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports.
Basic Setting Select which port settings (you configured in the Basic Setting menus) should be copied to the destination port(s).
Advanced
Application
Apply
Select which port settings (you configured in the should be copied to the destination ports.
Advanced Application menus)
Click Apply to save your changes to the switch’s run-time memory. The switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power, so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non-volatile memory when you are done configuring.
Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields.
240 Chapter 33 Configure Clone
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 34
Introducing Commands
This chapter introduces commands and gives a summary of commands available.
34.1 Overview
In addition to the web configurator, you can use commands to configure the switch. Use commands for advanced switch diagnosis and troubleshooting. If you have problems with your switch, customer support may request that you issue some of these commands to assist them in troubleshooting.
Note: See the web configurator parts of this User’s Guide for background information on features configurable by the web configurator.
34.2 Accessing the CLI
You can use a direct console connection or Telnet to access the command interpreter on the switch.
Note: The switch automatically logs you out of the management interface after five minutes of inactivity. If this happens to you, simply log back in again.
• By default, multiple command interpreter management session are allowed via either the console port or Telnet. However, no more than five concurrent login sessions are allowed.
• Use the configure multi-login command in the configuration mode to limit concurrent logins to one. Console port access has higher priority.
34.2.1 The Console Port
Connect to the switch’s console port using a terminal emulation software configured to the following settings:
• VT100 terminal emulation
• 9600 bps
• No parity
• 8 data bits
• 1 stop bit
• No flow control
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 241
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
34.2.1.1 Initial Screen
When you turn on your switch, it performs several internal tests as well as line initialization.
You can view the initialization information using the console port. After the initialization, the login screen displays (refer to
Copyright (c) 1994 - 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corp.
initialize mgmt, ethernet address: 00:13:49:00:00:01 initialize switch, ethernet address: 00:13:49:00:00:02
Initializing switch unit 0...
Initializing VLAN Database...
Initializing IP Interface...
Initializing Advanced Applications...
Initializing Command Line Interface...
Initializing Web Interface...
Press ENTER to continue...
Use the following steps to telnet into your switch.
1 For local management, connect your computer to the RJ-45 management port (labeled
MGMT ) on the switch.
2 Make sure your computer IP address and the switch IP address are on the same subnet. In
Windows, click Start (usually in the bottom left corner), Run and then type telnet
192.168.0.1
(the default management IP address) and click OK .
3 A login screen displays (refer to
34.3 The Login Screen
After you have successfully established a connection to the switch using a direct console connection or Telnet, a login screen displays as shown below. For your first login, enter the default administrator login username “admin” and password “1234”.
Enter User Name : admin
Enter Password : XXXX
34.4 Command Syntax Conventions
The rules of the commands are listed next.
• The command keywords are in courier new font .
• The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets <>, for instance, ping
<ip> means that you must specify an IP number for this command.
• The optional fields in a command are enclosed in square brackets [], for instance, configure snmp-server [contact <system contact>] [location <system location>]
242 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide means that the contact and location fields are optional.
• “Command” refers to a command used in the command line interface (CI command).
• The | symbol means “or”.
• The entry <cr> in the command lines refers to carriage return. Press [ENTER] or carriage return after a command to execute the command.
• Use the up or down arrow key to scroll through the command history list.
• You may enter a unique part of a command and press [TAB] to have the switch automatically display the full command. For example, if you enter “ config ” and press
[TAB], the full command of “configure” automatically displays.
• Each interface refers to an Ethernet port on the switch. Commands configured after the interface command correspond to those ports.
• Type multiple ports or port ranges separated by a comma. Ranges of port numbers are typed separated by a dash.
34.5 Changing the Password
This command is used to change the password for Enable mode. By default the same password is used to enter the command line interface (CLI) and Enable and Config modes of the CLI.
The password you change with this command is required to enter Enable and Config modes of the CLI.
Syntax: password <password> where password <password> = Specifies the new password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) users have to type in to enter Enable and Config modes.
34.6 Privilege Levels
You can use a command whose privilege level is equal to or less than that of your login account. For example, if your login account has a privilege level of 12, you can use all commands with privilege levels from 0 to 12. 0 privilege level commands are available to all login accounts.
Note: If you use an external RADIUS server to authenticate users, you can use a
VSA (Vendor Specific Attribute) to configure a privilege level for an account on
the RADIUS server. See Section 16.1.1.1 on page 145 for more information.
Use the following commands to specify privilege levels for login accounts.
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 243
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Syntax: logins username <username> password <password> logins username <username> privilege <0-14> where username <username> password <password> privilege <0-14>
= Specifies a new user (up to 32 alphanumeric characters). Enter a user name to change the settings of an existing account.
= Specifies the new password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) for this user.
= Assigns a privilege level for the user.
34.7 Command Modes
There are three command modes: User , Enable and Configure . The modes (and commands) available to you depend on what level of privilege your account has. See
for more information on setting up privilege levels.
When you first log into the command interpreter with a read-only account (having a privilege of 0 to 12), the initial mode is the User mode. The User mode commands are a subset of
Enable mode commands. The User mode command prompt ends with an angle bracket (>).
To enter Enable mode, type enable and enter the administrator password when prompted (the default is 1234). When you enter Enable mode, the command prompt changes to the pound sign ( # ). If you log into the command interpreter as an administrator you automatically enter
Enable mode.
The following table describes command interpreter modes and how to access them.
Table 83 Command Interpreter Mode Summary
MODE .
DESCRIPTION
HOW TO LOGIN/
ACCESS
PROMPT
User Commands available in this mode are a subset of enable mode. You can perform basic tests and display general system information.
Enable Commands available in this mode allow you to save configuration settings, reset configuration settings as well as display further system information. This mode also contains the configure command which takes you to config mode.
Default login level for a read-only account.
sysname>
The first part of the prompt is the system name. In the CLI examples in this User’s
Guide, the system name is always “sysname”.
Default login level for accounts with a privilege of 13 or 14.
Read-only accounts
(with a privilege of 0-
12) need to type the enable command and enter enable mode password.
sysname#
244 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 83 Command Interpreter Mode Summary (continued)
MODE .
DESCRIPTION
HOW TO LOGIN/
ACCESS
PROMPT
Config
Config-interface
Commands available in this mode allow you to configure settings that affect the switch globally.
Type config enable mode.
in sysname(config)#
Command modes that follow are sub-modes of the config mode and can only be accessed from within the config mode.
Config-vlan sysname(config-vlan)# This is a sub-mode of the config mode and allows you to configure VLAN settings.
Type vlan followed by a number (between 1 to
4094). For example, vlan 10 to configure settings for VLAN 10.
sysname(configinterface)#
This is a sub-mode of the config mode and allows you to configure port related settings.
Type interface port-channel i followed by a port number. For example, nterface portchannel 8 to configure port 8 on the switch.
Config-mvr This is a sub-mode of the config mode and allows you to configure multicast
VLAN settings.
To enter enter
MVR mvr
mode,
followed by a VLAN ID (between 1 and 4094). For example, enter mvr 2 to configure multicast settings on VLAN 2.
sysname(config-mvr)#
Enter exit to quit from the current mode or enter logout to exit the command interpreter.
34.8 Getting Help
The system includes a help facility to provide you with the following information about the commands:
• List of available commands under a command group.
• Detailed descriptions of the commands.
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 245
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
34.8.1 List of Available Commands
Enter “ help ” to display a list of available commands and the corresponding sub commands. sysname> help
Commands available:
help
logout
exit
history
enable
show ip <cr>
show hardware-monitor <C|F>
show system-information
ping <ip|host-name> <cr>
ping <ip|host-name> [vlan <vlan-id>][..]
ping help
traceroute <ip|host-name> <cr>
traceroute <ip|host-name> [vlan <vlan-id>][..]
traceroute help
ssh <1|2> <[user@]dest-ip> <cr>
ssh <1|2> <[user@]dest-ip> [command </>] sysname>
Enter “ ?
” to display a list of commands you can use. sysname> ?
enable Turn on privileged commands
exit Exit from the EXEC
help Description of the interactive help system
history Show a list of previously run commands
logout Exit from the EXEC
ping Exec ping
show Show system information
ssh SSH client
traceroute Exec traceroute sysname>
Enter <command> help to display detailed sub commands and parameters. sysname> ping help
Commands available:
ping <ip|host-name>
<
[ in-band|out-of-band|vlan <vlan-id> ]
[ size <0-1472> ]
[ -t ]
> sysname>
246 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Enter <command> ?
to display detailed help information about the sub commands and parameters. sysname> ping ?
<ip|host-name> destination ip address
help Description of ping help sysname>
34.9 Using Command History
The switch keeps a list of recently used commands available to you for reuse. You can use any commands in the history again by pressing the up ( y ) or down ( z ) arrow key to scroll through the previously used commands and press
[ENTER]
. Use the history command to display the list of commands. sysname> history
enable
exit
show ip
history sysname>
34.10 Saving Your Configuration
After you set the switch settings with the configuration commands, use the write memory command to save the changes permanently.
Note: The write memory command is not available in User mode.
You must save your changes after each CLI session. All unsaved configuration changes are lost once you restart the switch. sysname# write memory
34.10.1 Switch Configuration File
When you configure the switch using either the CLI (Command Line Interface) or web configurator, the settings are saved as a series of commands in a configuration file on the switch. You can perform the following with a configuration file:
• Back up switch configuration once the switch is set up to work in your network.
• Restore switch configuration.
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 247
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
• Use the same configuration file to set all switches (of the same model) in your network to the same settings.
Note: You may also edit a configuration file using a text editor.
Make sure you use valid commands. The switch rejects configuration files with invalid or incomplete commands.
34.10.2 Logging Out
In User or Enable mode, enter the exit or logout command to log out of the CLI. In Config mode entering exit takes you out of the Config mode and into Enable mode and entering logout logs you out of the CLI.
34.11 Command Summary
The following sections summarize the commands available in the switch together with a brief description of each command. Commands listed in the tables are in the same order as they are displayed in the CLI. See the related section in the User’s Guide for more background information.
34.11.1 User Mode
The following table describes the commands available for User mode.
Table 84 Command Summary: User Mode
COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE help logout exit history
Displays help information.
Exits from the CLI.
Logs out from the CLI. enable
Displays a list of previously command(s) that you have executed. The switch stores up to 256 commands in history.
Accesses Enable (or privileged) mode. See Section
. show ip Displays IP related information.
hardware-monitor
<C|F>
Displays current hardware monitor information with the specified temperature unit (Celsius C or
Fahrenheit F).
system-information Displays general system information. ping <IP|host-name> Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
248 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 84 Command Summary: User Mode (continued)
COMMAND
<IP|host-name> [vlan
<vlan-id>]
[size <0-1472>]
[-t] help tracerout e
<ip|host-name>
<ip|host-name>
[vlan <vlan-id>]
[ttl <1-255>]
[wait <1-60>]
[queries <1-10>] help ssh <1|2> <[user@]destip>
DESCRIPTION
Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device in the specified VLAN(s) with the specified parameters.
Displays command help information.
Determines the path a packet takes to a device.
Determines the path a packet takes to a device in a
VLAN.
0
Displays command help information.
Connects to an SSH server with the specified SSH version.
0
0
0
0
PRIVILEGE
0
34.11.2 Enable Mode disable configure
The following table describes the commands available for Enable mode.
Table 85 Command Summary: Enable Mode
COMMAND help logout exit history enable
DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE
Displays help information.
13
Exits Enable (or privileged) mode. 13
Exits Enable (or privileged) mode. 13
Displays a list of command(s) that you have previously executed.
Accesses Enable (or privileged) mode.
13
13
Exits Enable (or privileged) mode. 13
Accesses Configuration mode.
See
Tests stack port list.
13
13 stk-porttest no logging arp show interface <portnumber> ip arp tcp
Clears system logs.
Flushes the ARP (Address
Resolution Protocol) table.
Clears the interface status of the specified port(s).
13
13
13
Displays IP related information.
13
Displays the ARP table.
13
Displays TCP related information.
13
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 249
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 85 Command Summary: Enable Mode (continued)
COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE udp route
Displays UDP related information. 13
Displays IP routing information.
13 hardware-monitor
<C|F>
Displays IP static route information.
Displays current hardware monitor information with the specified temperature unit (Celsius C or
Fahrenheit F).
Displays general system information.
13
13
13 systeminformation vlan1q gvrp port-isolation spanning-tree config
Displays GVRP settings.
Displays port isolation settings.
13
13
Displays Spanning Tree Protocol
(STP) settings.
13 mrstp
<treeIndex> mac lacp
Displays the STP settings for the specific tree.
13 address-table
<all
[mac|vid|port]>
Displays MAC address table.
You can sort by MAC address, VID or port.
address-table static
13
Displays static MAC address table. 13 address-table count
Displays the number of static MAC address tables.
13
Displays LACP (Link Aggregation
Control Protocol) settings.
13 trunk Displays link aggregation information.
13
Displays RADIUS server settings. 13 radius-server port-accessauthenticator
Displays all port authentication settings.
13
<port-list> Displays port authentication settings on the specified port(s).
13
Displays all port security settings. 13 port-security
<port-list> Displays port security settings on the specified port(s).
13 snmp-server logins
Displays SNMP settings. 13
Displays login account information. 13
Displays service control settings. 13 service-control remotemanagement
Displays all secured client information.
13
<index> Displays the specified secured client information.
13
250 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 85 Command Summary: Enable Mode (continued)
COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE classifier policy
<name>
<name>
Displays all classifier related information.
Displays the specified classifier related information.
13
13
Displays all policy related information.
Displays the specified policy related information.
13
13
Displays current interface status. 13 interface <portlist> interfaces config <portlist>
Displays current interface configuration on the port(s).
13 vlan bandwidthcontrol egress bstorm-control
Displays bandwidth control settings on the port(s).
13
Displays outgoing port information on the port(s).
13
13 Displays broadcast storm control settings on the port(s).
Displays IGMP immediate leave settings on the port(s).
13 igmp-immediateleave igmp-filtering protocol-basedvlan
Displays IGMP filter profile settings on the port(s). igmp-grouplimited
Displays IGMP group settings on the port(s). igmp-query-mode Displays IGMP query mode settings on the port(s).
Displays protocol based VLAN settings on the port(s).
13
13
13
13
Displays the status of all VLANs. 13 running-config
<vlan-id> help
Displays the status of the specified
VLAN.
13
13 Displays current operating configuration.
Displays detailed information and parameters for this command.
13 timesync time garp interface portchannel <portlist>
[bandwidthlimit...]
Displays current operating configuration on a port by port basis. Optionally specifies which settings are displayed.
13
Displays time server information. 13
Displays current system time and date.
13
Displays GARP information.
13
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 251
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 85 Command Summary: Enable Mode (continued)
COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE loginPrecedence Displays login precedence settings.
Displays system logs.
13 logging vlan-stacking Displays VLAN stacking configuration.
Displays general SSH settings.
13
13 ssh 13 known-hosts Displays known SSH hosts information.
13 https key
<rsa1|rsa|dsa>
Displays internal SSH public and private key information.
13 session Displays current SSH session(s).
13
Displays the HTTPS information. 13 session Displays current HTTPS session(s).
13
Displays the HTTPS certificates. 13 certificate key <rsa|dsa> timeout
Displays the HTTPS key.
Displays the HTTPS session timeout.
Displays multi-login information
13
13
13 multi-login plt mac-aging-time cluster
Displays Packet Loop Test (PLT).
13
Displays MAC learning aging time. 13
13 candidates member member mac <macaddr> members config
Displays cluster management status.
Displays cluster candidate information.
Displays the MAC address of the cluster member(s).
Displays the status of the cluster member(s).
13
13
13
13 Displays the configuration of the cluster member(s).
Displays IGMP filter profile settings.
13 igmp-filtering profile igmp-snooping multicast mvr
Displays IGMP snooping settings. 13
Displays multicast settings. 13 pwr
<vlan-id>
DIsplays all MVR (Multicast VLAN
Registration) settings.
13
13 DIsplays specified MVR information.
Displays POE (Power over
Ethernet) settings on the switch.
Only available on the ES-
3124PWR.
13
252 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 85 Command Summary: Enable Mode (continued)
COMMAND diffserv
DESCRIPTION
Displays DiffServ settings on the switch.
Removes all IGMP information.
PRIVILEGE
13
13 igmpflush kick tcp mac-flush erase baudrate boot reload write copy
<Session ID>
<port-num> running-config
<1|2|3|4|5> config <index> config <index> memory tftp flash <ip>
<remote-file> tftp config
<index> <ip>
<remote-file> running-config tftp <ip>
<remote-file> copy runningconfig interface port-channel
<port> <portlist> interface portchannel <portlist>
[bandwidthlimit...]
Resets a TCP connection. Use the show ip tcp command to get the Session ID .
Clears the MAC address table.
13
13
Removes all learned MAC address on the specified port(s).
13
13 Resets to the factory default settings.
Resets to the factory default settings on a per port basis and optionally on a per feature configuration basis.
13
<index>
Changes the console port speed.
Choices are 1 (9600), 2 (19200),
3(38400), 4 (57600) and 5
(115200).
Restarts the system with the specified configuration file.
Restarts the system and use the specified configuration file.
Saves current configuration to the configuration file the switch is currently using.
Saves current configuration to the specified configuration file on the switch.
Restores firmware via TFTP.
13
13
13
13
13
13
Restores configuration with the specified filename from the specified TFTP server.
13
Backs up running configuration to the specified TFTP server with the specified file name.
13
Clones (copies) the attributes from the specified port to other ports.
13
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 253
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 85 Command Summary: Enable Mode (continued)
COMMAND cablediagnosti cs copy runningconfig interface port-channel
<port> <portlist>
[bandwidthlimit ....]
<port-list> ping <ip|host-name> help tracerout e
<ip|host-name>
[in-band|out-ofband|vlan <vlanid>][ttl <1-
255>] [wait <1-
60>] [queries
<1-10>] help
[vlan <vlanid>][..]
DESCRIPTION
Copies the specified attributes from one port to other ports.
PRIVILEGE
13
Performs a basic connectivity test on the ports. Displays “Ok” if connector is inserted in the port,
“Open” if no connector is inserted in the port or “Unknown” if this test cannot determine the status.
13
Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device.
13
Sends Ping request to an Ethernet device in the specified VLAN(s).
13
Displays command help information.
Determines the path a packet takes to a device.
13
13
13 ssh <1|2>
<[user@]dest-ip>
[command </>]
Displays command help information.
Connects to an SSH server with the specified SSH version.
Connects to an SSH server with the specified SSH version and addition commands to be executed on the server.
13
13
34.11.3 General Configuration Mode
The following table lists the commands in Configuration (or Config) mode.
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode
COMMAND help logout history exit
DESCRIPTION
Displays help information.
Exits from the CLI.
Displays a list of previous command(s) that you have executed.
Exits from Config mode into
Enable mode.
PRIVILEGE
13
13
13
13
254 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE mode zynos password no
<password> ip
Changes the CLI mode to the
ZyNOS format.
Change the password for accessing Enable mode.
13
14
Sets the management IP address to the default value.
13
Removes a specified IP static route.
13 route <ip>
<mask> route <ip>
<mask> inactive
<T1|T2|T3|T4|T
5|T6> interface
<port-list>
Enables a specified IP static route.
13 igmp-filtering lacp
Clears the IGMP filtering settings on the switch.
13 profile <name> Deletes the IGMP filtering profile. 13 profile <name> start-address
<ip> endaddress <ip>
Deletes a rule in the IGMP filtering profile.
13
Disables IGMP snooping.
13 igmp-snooping mac-forward mac <mac-addr> vlan <vlan-id> interface
<interface-id> mac <mac-addr> vlan <vlan-id>
Removes the specified MAC forwarding entry, belonging to a
VLAN group (if any) forwarded through an interface(s).
mac <mac-addr> vlan <vlan-id> interface
<interface-id> inactive
Enables the specified MAC address, belonging to a VLAN group (if any) forwarded through an interface(s).
<mac-addr> vlan <vlan-id> inactive
Enables the specified MAC-filter rule.
Disables the specified MAC filter rule.
mirror-port Disables port mirroring on the switch.
13
13
13
13
13
13 trunk <T1|T2|T3|T4|T
5|T6>
<T1|T2|T3|T4|T
5|T6> lacp
Disables the link aggregation control protocol (dynamic trunking) on the switch.
Disables the specified trunk group.
Disables LACP in the specified trunk group.
13
13
Removes ports from the specified trunk group.
13
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 255
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND bcp-transparency storm-control bandwidthcontrol vlan1q spanning-tree mrstp mrstp timesync radius-server port-accessauthenticator
DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE
Disables Bridge Control Protocol
(BCP) transparency.
13
Disables broadcast storm control. 13
Disable bandwidth control on the switch.
13 gvrp Disables GVRP on the switch.
port-isolation Disables port isolation.
Disables STP.
<port-list>
<treeIndex>
Disables STP on listed ports.
interface
<port-list>
Disables the specified STP configuration (tree 1-2).
Disables the STP assignment from the specified port(s).
<index>
13
13
13
13
13
13
Disables timeserver settings. 13
Disables the use of authentication from the specified RADIUS server.
Disables port authentication on the switch.
13
13
<port-list> 13
<port-list> reauthenticate port-security snmp-server
<port-list>
<port-list> learn inactive trapdestination
<ip> logins username
<name> service-control telnet ftp http ssh https
Disables authentication on the listed ports.
Disables the re-authentication mechanism on the listed port(s).
Disables port security on the switch.
Disables port security on the specified ports.
Enables MAC address learning on the specified ports.
Disables sending of SNMP traps to a station.
Disables login access to the specified name.
Disables telnet access to the switch.
Disables FTP access to the switch.
Disables web browser control to the switch.
Disables SSH (Secure Shell) server access to the switch.
Disables secure web browser access to the switch.
13
13
13
13
13
14
13
13
13
13
13
256 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND policy icmp remotemanagement snmp
<index>
<index> service
<[telnet]
[ftp] [http]
[icmp] [snmp]
[ssh] [https]> classifier <name>
<name> inactive
<name>
DESCRIPTION
Disables ICMP access to the switch such as pinging and tracerouting.
Disables SNMP management.
Clears a secure client set entry from the list of secure clients.
PRIVILEGE
13
13
13
Disables a secure client set entry number from using the selected remote management service(s).
13
Disables the classifier. Each classifier has one rule.
If you disable a classifier you cannot use policy rule related information.
Enables a classifier.
Deletes the policy. A policy sets actions for classifier traffic.
Enables a policy.
13
13
13
13 vlan dhcp-relay
<name> inactive
<vlan-id> vlan-stacking ssh option information key
<rsa1|rsa|dsa> known-hosts known-hosts
<host-ip> known-hosts
<host-ip>
[1024|sshrsa|ssh-dsa] https timeout
Deletes the static VLAN entry.
Disables DHCP relay.
Disables the relay agent information option 82.
System name is not appended to option 82 information field.
Disables VLAN stacking on the switch.
Disables the secure shell server encryption key. Your switch supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA and DSA authentication.
Removes all remote hosts.
13
13
13
13
13
13
Removes the specified remote host from the list of all known hosts.
Removes remote known hosts with the specified public key
(1024-bit RSA1, RSA or DSA).
13
13
13
Resets the session timeout to the default of 300 seconds.
13
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 257
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE multi-login cluster
Disables another administrator from logging into Telnet.
Disables cluster management on the switch.
14
13 vlan cluster member <mac-address> Removes the cluster member.
mvr <vlan-id> Disables MVR on the switch.
fe-spq Disables Strict Priority Queuing on the switch.
ge-spq <q0|q1
...|q7> syslog
Disables strict priority queuing on the Gigabit ports.
Disables syslog logging. server <ipaddress>
Disables syslog logging to the specified syslog server. server <ipaddress> inactive type [type]
Enables syslog logging to the specified syslog server.
<1-4094>
DIsables syslog logging for the specified log type ( sys , link , config , error or report ).
Enters the VLAN configuration
mode. See Section 34.11.5 on page 271 for more information.
Specifies the VLAN type.
vlan-type <802.1q|portbased> igmpsnooping igmp-snooping
8021p-priority
<0-7>
Enables IGMP snooping.
Sets the 802.1p priority for outgoing igmp control packets.\ host-timeout leave-timeout
<1-16711450>
<1-16711450>
Sets the host timeout value.
Sets the leave timeout value
Sets how to treat traffic from unknown multicast group. unknownmulticast-frame
<drop|flooding> reservedmulticast-group
<drop|flooding>
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
Sets how to treat traffic belonging to reserved multicast groups.
13 igmpfiltering
Enables IGMP filtering on the switch.
13 profile <name> start-address
<ip> end-address
<ip>
Sets the range of multicast address(es) in a profile.
13
258 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND interface spq wfq wrr fe-spq
<q0|q1|..| q7> ge-spq
<q0|q1
...|q7> ip macforward port-channel
<port-list> route name-server address defaultgateway address name <name> mac
<mac-addr> vlan
<vlan-id> interface
<interface-id>
<ip>
<ip> <mask>
DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE
Enables a port or a list of ports for configuration. See
details.
13
Sets the queuing method to SPQ
(Strictly Priority Queuing).
Sets the queuing method to WFQ
(Weighted Fair Queuing).
13
13
Sets the queuing method to WRR
(Weighted Round Robin).
13
13 Sets the switch to use SPQ to service the subsequent queue(s) after and including the specified queue for the 10/100 Mbps
Ethernet ports.
Enables strict priority queuing starting with the specified queue and subsequent higher queues on the Gigabit ports.
Creates a static route.
13 <ip> <mask>
<next-hop-ip>
<ip> <mask>
<next-hop-ip>
[metric
<metric>]
[name <name>]
[inactive]
<ip>
Sets the metric of a static route or deactivates a static route.
13
Sets the IP address of a domain name server.
Sets the default gateway's IP address for the out-of-band management port.
Sets the IP address and subnet mask of the out-of-band management port.
Configures a static MAC address forwarding rule.
13
13
13
13 mac-filter name <name> mac
<mac-addr> vlan
<vlan-id> drop
<src/dst/both> inactive Disables a static MAC address forwarding rule.
Configures a static MAC address port filtering rule.
13
13 inactive Disables a static MAC address port filtering rule.
13
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 259
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND mirrorport
DESCRIPTION
Enables port mirroring.
lacp
<port-num> system-priority trunk <T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|
T6>
<T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|
T6> lacp
<T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|
T6> interface
<port-list> interface <portlist> timeout
<lacp-timeout> cluster <vlan-id>
<1-65535>
Adds a port(s) to the specified trunk group.
Defines the port number and
LACP timeout period.
PRIVILEGE
13
Sets the monitor port (the port to which traffic is copied for analysis).
13
Enables Link Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP).
13
13 Sets the priority of an active port using LACP.
Activates a trunk group.
13
Enables LACP for a trunk group.
13
13
13 name <cluster name> member <macaddress> password
<password-str> rcommand <macaddress>
Sets the cluster management
VLAN ID.
Configures a name to identify the cluster manager.
13
13
Sets the cluster member switch's hardware MAC address and password.
13
Logs into a cluster member switch.
13
260 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND classifier <name>
<[ packet-format
<802.3untag|802.
3tag|EtherIIunta g|EtherIItag> ]
[ priority <0-7>
] [ vlan <vlan-id> ]
[ ethernet-type
<ethernum|ip|ipx|arp|r arp|appletalk|de cnet|sna|netbios
|dlc> ] [ source-mac <srcmac-addr> ]
[ source-port
<port-num> ]
[ destinationmac <dest-macaddr> ] [ dscp <0-63> ]
[ ip-protocol
<protocolnum|tcp|udp|icmp
|egp|ospf|rsvp|i gmp|igp|pim|ipse c> [establishonly] ] [ source-ip <srcip-addr> [maskbits <maskbits>] ] [ source-socket
<socket-num> ]
[ destination-ip
<dest-ip-addr>
[mask-bits
<mask-bits>] ]
[ destinationsocket <socketnum> ] [ inactive ] >
DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE
Configures a classifier. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming port number.
13
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 261
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND policy radiusserver
<name> classifier
<classifierlist> < [ vlan<vlan-id> ]
[ egress-port
<port-num> ]
[ priority <0-7>
] [ dscp <0-
63>] [ tos
<0-7> ] [ bandwidth
<bandwidth> ]
[ outgoingpacket-format
<tagged|untagged
> ] [ outof-profile-dscp
<0-63> ] [ forward-action
<drop|forward> ]
[ queue-action
<prio-set|prioqueue|prioreplace-tos> ]
[ diffservaction <diffset-tos|diffreplacepriority|diffset-dscp> ]
[ outgoingmirror ] [ outgoing-eport]
[ outgoing-nonunicast-eport ]
[ outgoing-setvlan ] [ metering]
[ out-ofprofile-action
<[ change-dscp ][ drop ][ forward
][set-dropprec]> ][ inactive ] > host <index> <ip>
DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE
Configures a policy. A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria.
A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network.
13
[auth-port
<socketnumber>] [key
<key-string>]
Specifies the IP address of
RADIUS server 1 or RADIUS server 2 (index =1 or index =2).
Sets the port number and key of the external RADIUS server.
13
13
262 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND portaccessauthentica tor timeout <1-1000> mode <priority|roun d-robin>
DESCRIPTION
Specifies the RADIUS server timeout value.
Specifies the mode for RADIUS server selection.
PRIVILEGE
13
13
Enables 802.1x authentication on the switch.
13 portsecurity
<port-list>
<port-list>
Enables 802.1x authentication on the specified port(s).
13
13 reauthenticate Sets a subscriber to periodically re-enter his or her username and password to stay connected to a specified port.
reauth-period
<reauthperiod>
Specifies how often a client has to re-enter the username and password to stay connected to the specified port(s).
Enables port security on the switch.
13
13
13 Enables the port security feature on the specified port(s).
learn inactive Disables MAC address learning on the specified port(s).
address-limit
<number>
MAC-freeze
Limits the number of (dynamic)
MAC addresses that may be learned on a port.
Disables MAC address learning and enables port security.
13
13
13 vlan1q gvrp port-isolation
<100-65535> leave <msec> leaveall <msec> spanningtree priority <0-
61440>
Note: All previously learned dynamic
MAC addresses are saved to the static
MAC address table.
Enables GVRP.
Enables port-isolation.
13
13
Configures GARP time settings.
13
Enables STP on the switch.
Sets the bridge priority of the switch.
13
13
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 263
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND mrstp hello-time <1-
10> maximum-age
<6-40> forwarddelay <4-30>
<port-list>
<port-list> path-cost <1-
65535>
<port-list> priority <0-255> help
<treeIndex>
DESCRIPTION
Sets Hello Time, Maximum Age and Forward Delay.
PRIVILEGE
13
Enables STP on a specified port. 13
Sets the STP path cost for a specified port.
13 interface <portlist> help hostname <name_string> time timesync
<Hour:Min:Sec> timezone <-
1200|...|1200> date <month/day/ year> help
<daytime|time|nt p> server <ip> path-cost <1-
65535> priority <0-
255> treeIndex <1-
2>
Sets the priority for a specified port.
Displays help information.
Activates the specified STP configuration.
Activates STP on the specified ports.
13
13
13
13
Sets a path cost to the specified ports.
Sets the priority value to the specified ports for STP.
13
13
Assigns a specific STP configuration to the ports.
13
Displays the detailed help for the mrstp command.
Sets the switch’s name for identification purposes.
13
13
Sets the time in hour, minute and second format.
Selects the time difference between UTC (formerly known as
GMT) and your time zone.
Sets the date in year, month and day format.
13
13
13
Displays help information.
Sets the time server protocol.
13
13 loginPrece dence bcptransparen cy queue
<LocalOnly |
LocalRADIUS |
RADIUSOnly> priority <0-7> level <0-7>
Sets the IP address of your time server.
Select which database the switch should use (first) to authenticate a user.
13
14
Enables Bridge Control Protocol
(BCP) transparency.
13
Sets the priority level-to-physical queue mapping.
13
264 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND stormcontrol bandwidthcontrol mac-agingtime snmpserver
<10-3000> get-community
<property> set-community
<property> trap-community
<property> trap-destination
<ip>
DESCRIPTION
Enables broadcast storm control on the switch.
Enables bandwidth control.
PRIVILEGE
13
13
Sets learned MAC aging time.
Sets the get community.
Sets the set community.
Sets the trap community.
13
13
13
13
Sets the IP addresses of up to four stations to send your SNMP traps to.
Sets the geographic location and the name of the person in charge of this switch.
13
13 [contact <system contact>]
[location
<system location>]
<name> password <pwd> servicecontrol username <name> privilege <0-
14> icmp snmp http <socketnumber>
<timeout> telnet <socketnumber> ftp <socketnumber> ssh <socketnumber> https <socketnumber> remotemanagement
<index>
Configures a default (read-only) account.
Assigns a privilege level to user accounts.
14
14
Allows ICMP access for services such as Ping.
13
Allows SNMP management.
13
Allows HTTP access on the specified service port and defines the timeout period.
13
Allows Telnet access on the specified service port.
Allows FTP access on the specified service port.
Allows SSH access on the specified service port.
Allows HTTPS access on the specified service port.
Enables a specified secured client set.
13
13
13
13
13
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 265
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND adminpassword syslog vlanstacking
DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE
<index> startaddr <ip> endaddr <ip> service
<[telnet] [ftp]
[http] [icmp]
[snmp] [ssh]
[https]>
<pw-string>
<confirm-string>
Specifies a group of trusted computer(s) from which an administrator may use a service to manage the switch.
Changes the administrator password.
server <ipaddress> server <ipaddress> inactive
Enables syslog logging on the switch.
Enables syslog logging to the specified syslog server.
Disables syslog logging to the specified syslog server. type <type> facility [local 1
..7] level [0 ~ 7] Sets the IP address of the syslog server and the severity level.
Sets the log type and the file location on the syslog server.
Enables VLAN stacking on the switch.
13
14
13
13
13
13
13
13
<SPTPID> Sets the SP TPID (Service
Provider Tag Protocol Identifier).
Specifies through which traffic flow the switch is to send packets.
13
13
Adds a remote host to which the switch can access using SSH service.
13 defaultmanagement
<in-band|out-ofband> ssh known-hosts
<host-ip>
<1024|sshrsa|ssh-dsa>
<key> https certregeneration
<rsa|dsa> timeout <0-
65535> multilogin mvr <vlanid>
Re-generates a certificate.
Sets the HTTPS timeout period.
13
Enables multi-login.
13
14 dhcp-relay helper-address
<svr_ip>
[svr2_ip]
[svr3_ip]
Enters the MVR (Multicast VLAN
Registration) configuration mode.
See
for more information.
Enables DHCP relay.
13
13
Sets the IP addresses of up to 3
DHCP servers.
13
266 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 86 Command Summary: Configuration Mode (continued)
COMMAND diffserv pwr option information dscp <0-63> interface <portlist> usagethreshold
<1-99> mibtrap
DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE
Allows the switch to add DHCP relay agent information.
Allows the switch to add system name to agent information.
Enables DiffServ on the switch.
13
13
13 priority <0-7> Maps DSCP value with an 802.1p value.
13
13 Enables PoE (Power over
Ethernet) on the specified ports.
ES-3124PWR only.
Sets the percentage of power usage which initiates mib traps.
ES-3124PWR only.
Enables mib traps on the switch
(ES-3124PWR only). Traps are initiated when the usage reaches the limit set up by the usagethreshold command.
13
34.11.4 interface port-channel Commands
The following table lists the interface port-channel commands in configuration mode.
Use these commands to configure the ports.
Table 87 interface port-channel Commands
COMMAND interface portchannel
<portlist> weight <wt1>
<wt2> ... <wt8> egress set
<port-list> igmp-immediateleave igmp-filtering profile <name> igmp-grouplimited igmp-grouplimited number
<number>
DESCRIPTION
Enables a port or a list of ports for configuration.
PRIVILEGE
13
Sets the interface to use WFQ weighting. A weight value of one to eight is given to each variable from wt 1 to wt 8.
13
Sets the outgoing traffic port list for a port-based VLAN.
13
Enables IGMP immediate leave on the port.
13
13 Sets the IGMP filtering profile for this port.
Limits the number of multicast groups.
13
Sets the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join.
13
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 267
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 87 interface port-channel Commands (continued)
COMMAND igmp-queriermode
<auto|fixed|edg e> pvid <1-4094> ingress-check gvrp frame-type
<all|tagged|unt agged> name <portname-string> vlan-trunking flow-control bandwidth-limit cir cir <Kbps> pir pir <Kbps>
DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE
Sets the IGMP querier mode of a port.
Selects auto to treat the IGMP queries normally, fixed to always treat the port as a querier port no matter there is a query or edge to treat the port as a nonquerier port which drops any IGMP queries received.
13
The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports. Sets a PVID in the range 1 to
4094 for the specified interface.
13
13 Enables the device to discard incoming frames for VLANs that are not included in a port member set.
Enables this function to permit
VLAN groups beyond the local switch.
13
Choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames, just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port.
13
13 Sets a name for the port(s). Enter a descriptive name (up to nine printable ASCII characters).
Enables VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers (but not ports directly connected to end users) to allow frames belonging to unknown
VLAN groups to pass through the switch.
13
Enables interface flow control.
Flow control regulates transmissions to match the bandwidth of the receiving port.
Enables ingress (pir), cir and egress limits on the port(s).
13
13
Enables the guaranteed bandwidth limits for incoming traffic on the port(s).
13
13 Sets the guaranteed bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic on the port(s).
Enables bandwidth limits allowed for incoming traffic on the port(s).
13
Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic on the port(s).
13
268 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 87 interface port-channel Commands (continued)
COMMAND broadcast-limit multicast-limit dlf-limit diffserv qos priority mirror bpdu-control
<peer|tunnel|di scard|network> egress egress <Kbps>
<pkt/s>
<pkt/s>
<pkt/s>
<0 .. 7> dir
<ingress|egress
|both> speed-duplex <auto|10half|10full|100half|100full|1000-full>
DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE
Enables bandwidth limits allowed for outgoing traffic on the port(s).
Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for outgoing traffic on the port(s).
Enables broadcast storm control limit on the switch.
Sets how many broadcast packets the interface receives per second.
Enables the interface multicast limit.
Sets how many multicast packets the interface receives per second.
Enables the Destination Lookup
Failure (DLF) limit.
Sets the interface DLF limit in packets per second (pps).
Enables DiffServ on the port(s).
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13 Sets the quality of service priority for an interface.
Enables port mirroring in the interface.
Enables port mirroring for incoming, outgoing or both incoming and outgoing traffic.
Port mirroring copies traffic from one or all ports to another or all ports for external analysis.
Sets the duplex mode ( half or full ) and speed ( 10 , 100 or
1000 Mbps) of the connection on the interface. Selecting auto able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support.
(auto-negotiation) makes one port
Sets how Bridge Protocol Data
Units (BPDUs) are used in STP port states.
13
13
13
13 set
<port-list>
Disables the outgoing traffic port list for a port-based VLAN.
protocol-basedvlan ethernettype <ethernettype>
Disables protocol based VLAN of the specified protocol on the port.
igmp-immediateleave
Disables IGMP immediate leave on the port.
13
13
13
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 269
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 87 interface port-channel Commands (continued)
COMMAND inactive help vlan-stacking role
<normal|access| tunnel> vlan-stacking
SPVID <1-4094> vlan-stacking priority <0-7> exit intrusion-lock test
DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE igmp-filtering profile igmp-grouplimited ingress-check
Disables IGMP filtering on the port. 13
Disables IGMP group limitation.
13
Disables ingress checking on the port(s).
Disable GVRP on the port(s).
13 gvrp flow-control vlan-trunking mirror
Disables VLAN trunking on the port(s).
Disables port mirroring on the port(s). bandwidth-limit Disables bandwidth limit on the port(s).
broadcast-limit Disables broadcast storm control limit on the switch.
13
Disables flow control on the port(s). 13
13
13
13
13 multicast-limit Disables multicast limit on the switch.
dlf-limit Disables destination lookup failure
(DLF) limit on the switch.
13
13 inactive Enables the port(s) on the switch.
13 intrusion-lock Disables intrusion-lock on a port so that a port can be connected again after you disconnected the cable.
13
13 Disables the specified port(s) on the switch.
Displays a description of the interface port-channel commands.
Sets the VLAN stacking port roles of the specified interface.
13
13
Sets the service provider VID of the specified interface.
Sets the priority of the specified interface in VLAN stacking.
Exits from the interface portchannel command mode.
Enables intrusion lock on a port and a port cannot be connected again after you disconnected the cable.
Performs an interface loopback test.
13
13
13
13
13
270 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 87 interface port-channel Commands (continued)
COMMAND protocol-basedvlan name
<name> ethernet-type
<ethernet-type> vlan <vid> priority <0-7> inactive
DESCRIPTION
Creates a protocol based VLAN with the specified parameters.
PRIVILEGE
13
Disables the protocol based VLAN. 13
34.11.5 config-vlan Commands
The following table lists the vlan commands in configuration mode.
Table 88 Command Summary: config-vlan Commands
COMMAND vlan <1-
4094>
DESCRIPTION
Creates a new VLAN group.
PRIVILEGE
13 name <name-str> normal <portlist> fixed <portlist> forbidden <portlist> untagged <portlist>
Specifies a name for identification purposes.
Specifies the port(s) to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP
13
13
Specifies the port(s) to be a permanent member of this VLAN group.
Specifies the port(s) you want to prohibit from joining this VLAN group.
13
13
Specifies the port(s) you don’t want to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group
ID.
Disables the specified VLAN.
13
13 inactive help Displays a list of available VLAN commands.
13 no fixed list>
Sets fixed port(s) to normal port(s). 13 forbidden
<port-list>
Sets forbidden port(s) to normal port(s).
13 untagged <portlist>
Enables VLAN tagging for outgoing traffic on the specified port(s).
13 inactive Enables the specified VLAN. 13
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 271
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 88 Command Summary: config-vlan Commands (continued)
COMMAND exit ip address
DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE ip address inband-default dhcp-bootp
Sets the default in-band interface to use a static IP address in this
VLAN.
The switch will use the default IP address of 0.0.0.0 if you do not configure a static IP address.
13
Deletes the IP address and subnet mask from this VLAN.
13 ip address <ipaddress> <mask> ip address default-gateway
Deletes the default gateway from this VLAN. inband-default dhcp-bootp
Leaves the VLAN configuration mode.
Sets the dynamic in-band IP address.
inband-default dhcp-bootp release inband-default dhcp-bootp renew
Releases the dynamic in-band IP address.
Updates the dynamic in-band IP address. inband-default
<ip-address>
<mask>
<ip-address>
<mask> manageable
Sets a static in-band IP address and subnet mask.
Sets the management IP address and subnet mask of the switch in the specified VLAN.
<ip-address>
<mask>
Sets the IP address and subnet mask of the switch in the specified
VLAN. default-gateway
<ip-address>
Sets a default gateway IP address for this VLAN.
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
34.11.6 mvr Commands
The following table lists the mvr commands in configuration mode.
Table 89 mvr Commands
COMMAND mvr <1-
4094> source-port
<port-list>
DESCRIPTION
Enters the MVR (Multicast VLAN
Registration) configuration mode.
PRIVILEGE
13
Sets the source port(s).
An MVR source port can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN.
13
272 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
Table 89 mvr Commands (continued)
COMMAND receiver-port
<port-list> inactive mode
<dynamic|compati ble> name <name-str> tagged <portlist> group <name-str> start-address
<ip> end-address
<ip> exit
8021p-priority
<0-7> no source-port
<port-list> no receiver-port
<port-list> no tagged <portlist> no inactive no group no group <namestr>
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
DESCRIPTION PRIVILEGE
Sets the receiver port(s).
An MVR receiver port can only receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN.
Disables MVR settings.
13
13
Sets the MVR mode ( dynamic or compatible ).
13
Sets the MVR name for identification purposes.
13
Sets the port(s) to tag VLAN tags. 13
Sets the multicast group range for the MVR.
13
Exist from the MVR configuration mode.
Sets a priority level (0-7) to which the switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets.
13
13
Disables the source port(s).
An MVR source port can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN.
13
13 Disables the receiver port(s).
An MVR receiver port can only receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN.
Sets the port(s) to untag VLAN tags.
13
Enables MVR. 13
Disables all MVR group settings.
13
Disables the specified MVR group setting.
13
Chapter 34 Introducing Commands 273
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
274 Chapter 34 Introducing Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 35
User and Enable Mode
Commands
This chapter describes some commands which you can perform in the User and Enable modes.
35.1 Overview
The following command examples show how you can use User and Enable modes to diagnose and manage your switch.
35.2 show Commands
These are the commonly used show commands.
35.2.1 show system-information
Syntax: show system-information
This command shows the general system information (such as the firmware version and system up time).
An example is shown next. sysname# show system-info
System Name : ES-3124
System Contact :
System Location :
Ethernet Address : 00:13:49:6a:d1:87
ZyNOS F/W Version : 3.70(TP.0)b0 | 4/28/2006
RomRasSize : 2483368
System up Time : 3:42:28 (145e1d ticks)
Bootbase Version : V0.6 | 01/14/2005
Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands 275
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
35.2.2 show ip
Syntax: show ip
This command displays the IP related information (such as IP address and subnet mask) on all switch interfaces.
The following figure shows the default interface settings. sysname> show ip
Out-of-band Management IP Address = 192.168.0.1
Management IP Address
IP[192.168.0.1], Netmask[255.255.255.0], VID[0]
IP Interface
IP[192.168.1.1], Netmask[255.255.255.0], VID[1] sysname>
35.2.3 show logging
Syntax: show logging
This command displays the system logs. The following figure shows an example. sysname# show logging
1 Thu Jan 1 00:02:08 1970 PP05 -WARN SNMP TRAP 3: link up
2 Thu Jan 1 00:03:14 1970 INFO adjtime task pause 1 day
3 Thu Jan 1 00:03:16 1970 PP0f -WARN SNMP TRAP 26: Event On Trap
4 Thu Jan 1 00:03:16 1970 PINI -WARN SNMP TRAP 1: warm start
5 Thu Jan 1 00:03:16 1970 PINI -WARN SNMP TRAP 3: link up
6 Thu Jan 1 00:03:16 1970 PINI INFO main: init completed
7 Thu Jan 1 00:00:13 1970 PP26 INFO adjtime task pause 1 day
8 Thu Jan 1 00:00:14 1970 PP0f -WARN SNMP TRAP 26: Event On Trap
9 Thu Jan 1 00:00:14 1970 PINI -WARN SNMP TRAP 0: cold start
10 Thu Jan 1 00:00:14 1970 PINI INFO main: init completed
11 Thu Jan 1 00:00:04 1970 PP05 -WARN SNMP TRAP 3: link up
11 Thu Jan 1 00:00:04 1970 PP05 -WARN SNMP TRAP 3: link up
Clear Error Log (y/n):
Note: If you clear a log (by entering y at the Clear Error Log (y/n): prompt), you cannot view it again.
35.2.4 show interface
Syntax: show interface [port-number]
276 Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
This command displays statistics of a port. The following example shows that port 2 is up and the related information. sysname# show interface 2
Port Info Port NO. :2
Link :100M/F
Status :FORWARDING
LACP :Disabled
TxPkts :0
RxPkts :63
Errors :0
Tx KBs/s :0.0
Rx KBs/s :0.0
Up Time :0:02:33
TX Packet Tx Packets :0
Multicast :0
Broadcast :0
Pause :0
Tagged :0
RX Packet Rx Packets :63
Multicast :0
Broadcast :63
Pause :0
Control :0
TX Collison Single :0
Multiple :0
Excessive :0
Late :0
Error Packet RX CRC :0
Length :0
Runt :0
Distribution 64 :3
65 to 127 :44
128 to 255 :14
256 to 511 :2
512 to 1023 :0
1024 to 1518 :0
Giant :0 sysname#
35.2.5 show mac address-table
Syntax: show mac address-table <all <sort>|static>
Where
<sort> = Specifies the sorting criteria (MAC, VID or port).
Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands 277
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
This command displays the MAC address(es) stored in the switch. The following example shows the static MAC address table. sysname# show mac address-table static
Port VLAN ID MAC Address Type
CPU 1 00:a0:c5:01:23:46 Static sysname#
35.3 ping
Syntax: ping <ip|host-name> < [in-band|out-of-band|vlan <vlan-id> ] [ size
-> <0-1472> ] [ -t ]> where
<ip|host-name> = The IP address or host name of an Ethernet device.
[in-band|out-ofband|vlan <vlan-id>
]
= Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the
Ethernet device belongs. out-of-band refers to the management port while in-band means the other ports on the switch.
[ size <0-1472> ]
[ -t ]
= Specifies the packet size to send.
= Sends Ping packets to the Ethernet device indefinitely. Press
[CTRL]+ C to terminate the Ping process.
This command sends Ping packets to an Ethernet device. The following example sends Ping requests to and displays the replies from an Ethernet device with an IP address of
192.168.1.100
. sysname# ping 192.168.1.100
sent rcvd rate rtt avg mdev max min reply from
1 1 100 0 0 0 0 0 192.168.1.100
2 2 100 0 0 0 0 0 192.168.1.100
3 3 100 0 0 0 0 0 192.168.1.100
sysname#
35.4 traceroute
Syntax: traceroute <ip|host-name> [in-band|out-of-band|vlan <vlan-id>][ttl
-> <1-255>] [wait <1-60>] [queries <1-10>]
278 Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide where
<ip|host-name>
[in-band|out-ofband|vlan <vlanid> ]
[ttl <1-255>]
[wait <1-60>]
[queries <1-10>]
= The IP address or host name of an Ethernet device.
= Specifies the network interface or the VLAN ID to which the
Ethernet device belongs.
= Specifies the Time To Live (TTL) period.
= Specifies the time period to wait.
= Specifies how many tries the switch performs the traceroute function.
This command displays information about the route to an Ethernet device. The following example displays route information to an Ethernet device with an IP address of
192.168.1.100
. sysname> traceroute 192.168.1.100
traceroute to 192.168.1.100, 30 hops max, 40 byte packet
1:192.168.1.100 (10 ms) (10 ms) (0 ms) traceroute done: sysname>
35.5 Copy Port Attributes
Use the copy running-config command to copy attributes of one port to another port or ports.
Syntax: copy running-config interface port-channel <port> <port-list> copy running-config interface port-channel <port> <port-list>
-> [active] [name] [speed-duplex] [bpdu-control] [flow-control]
-> [intrusion-lock] [vlan1q] [vlan1q-member] [bandwidth-limit]
-> [vlan-stacking] [port-security] [broadcast-storm-control] [mirroring]
-> [port-access-authenticator] [queuing-method] [igmp-filtering]
-> [spanning-tree] [mrstp] [protocol-based-vlan] [port-based-vlan]
Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands 279
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide where copy running-config interface portchannel <port>
<port-list> copy running-config interface portchannel <port>
<port-list> [active
... ]
= Copies all of the possible attributes from one port to another port or ports.
= Copies only the specified port attributes from one port to another port or ports.
An example is shown next.
• Copy all attributes of port 1 to port 2
• Copy selected attributes (active, bandwidth limit and STP settings) to ports 5-8 sysname# copy running-config interface port-channel 1 2 sysname# copy running-config interface port-channel 1 5-8 active bandwidth-limit spanning-tree
35.6 Configuration File Maintenance
The following sections shows how to manage the configuration files.
35.6.1 Using a Different Configuration File
You can store up to two configuration files on the switch. Only one configuration file is used at a time. By default the switch uses the first configuration file (with an index number of 1).
You can set the switch to use a different configuration file. There are two ways in which you can set the switch to use a different configuration file: restart the switch (cold reboot) and restart the system (warm reboot).
Use the boot config command to restart the switch and use a different configuration file (if specified). The following example restarts the switch to use the second configuration file. sysname# boot config 2
Use the reload config command to restart the system and use a different configuration file
(if specified). The following example restarts the system to use the second configuration file. sysname# reload config 2
280 Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Note: When you use the write memory command without specifying a configuration file index number, the switch saves the changes to the configuration file the switch is currently using.
35.6.2 Resetting to the Factory Default
Follow the steps below to reset the switch back to the factory defaults.
1 Enter erase running config to reset the current running configuration.
2 Enter write memory to save the changes to the current configuration file. If you want to reset the second configuration file, use the write memory command again with the specified index number.
The following example resets both configuration files to the factory default settings. sysname# erase running-config sysname# write memory sysname# write memory 2
Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands 281
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
282 Chapter 35 User and Enable Mode Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 36
Configuration Mode Commands
This chapter describes how to enable and configure your switch’s features using commands.
For more background information, see the feature specific chapters which proceed the commands chapters.
36.1 Enabling IGMP Snooping
To enable IGMP snooping on the switch. Enter igmp-snooping and press [ENTER]. You can also set how to treat traffic from an unknown multicast group by typing the unknownmulticast-frame parameter.
Syntax: igmp-snooping igmp-snooping 8021p-priority <0-7> igmp-snooping host-timeout <1-16711450> igmp-snooping leave-timeout <1-16711450> igmp-snooping unknown-multicast-frame <drop|flooding> igmp-snooping reserved-multicast-group <drop|flooding> where igmp-snooping igmp-snooping 8021ppriority <0-7> host-timeout <1-
16711450> leave-timeout <1-
16711450> unknown-multicastframe <drop|flooding> reserved-multicastgroup <drop|flooding>
= Enables IGMP snooping on the switch.
= Sets the 802.1p priority for outgoing igmp control packets.
= Specifies the time out period of the switch with respect to
IGMP report queries. If an IGMP report for a multicast group was not received for a host-timeout period, from a specific port, this port is deleted from the member list of that multicast group.
= Specifies the time that the switch will wait for multicast members to respond to a leave report. If no response happens in the timeout period, the switch deletes the port from the multicast group.
= Specifies whether you want to discard packets from unknown multicast groups or whether you want to forward them to all ports.
= Specifies whether you want to discard packets in the reserved multicast groups or whether you want to forward them to all ports.
Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 283
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
An example is shown next.
• Enable IGMP snooping on the switch.
• Set the host-timeout and leave-timeout values to 30 seconds
• Set the switch to drop packets from unknown multicast groups. sysname(config)# igmp-snooping sysname(config)# igmp-snooping host-timeout 30 sysname(config)# igmp-snooping leave-timeout 30 sysname(config)# igmp-snooping unknown-multicast-frame drop
36.2 Configure IGMP Filter
Use the following commands in the config mode to configure IGMP filtering profiles.
Syntax: igmp-filtering igmp-filtering profile <name> start-address <ip> end-address <ip> where igmp filtering = Enables IGMP filtering on the switch profile <name> = Specifies a name (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) for this IGMP profile. If you want to edit an existing IGMP profile enter the existing profile name followed by start-address and end-address parameters. start-address end-address
= Specifies the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile. IP address in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 are used for IP multicasting.
= Specifies the ending multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile. IP address in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 are used for IP multicasting.
An example is shown next.
• Enable IGMP filtering on the switch.
• Create an IGMP filtering profile filter1 and specify the multicast IP addresses in the range 224.255.255.0
to 225.255.255.255
to belong to this profile. sysname(config)# igmp-filtering sysname(config)# igmp-filtering profile filter1 start-address
224.255.255.0 end-address 225.255.255.255
284 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
36.3 Enabling STP
Use the spanning-tree or the mrstp commands to enable and configure STP on the switch.
The difference between the commands is that spanning-tree only allows you to set up one spanning tree configuration and the mrstp command allows you to set up multiple ones.
Syntax: and spanning-tree spanning-tree priority <0-61440> spanning-tree hello-time <1-10> maximum-age <6-40> forward-delay <4-30> spanning-tree <port-list> path-cost <1-65535> spanning-tree <port-list> priority <0-255> mrstp <treeIndex> <cr> mrstp <treeIndex> priority <0-61440> mrstp <treeIndex> hello-time <1-10> maximum-age <6-40> forward-delay
-> <4-30> mrstp interface <port-list> <cr> mrstp interface <port-list> path-cost <1-65535> mrstp interface <port-list> priority <0-255> mrstp interface <port-list> treeIndex <1-2> where spanning-tree mrstp <treeIndex> priority <0-61440>
= Enables STP on the switch.
Enables a specific tree configuration.
= Specifies the bridge priority for the switch. The lower the numeric value you assign, the higher the priority for this bridge.
Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch, root port and designated port. The switch with the highest priority
(lowest numeric value) becomes the STP root switch. If all switches have the same priority, the switch with the lowest
MAC address will then become the root switch. hello-time <1-10>
Bridge Priority determines the root bridge, which in turn determines Hello Time, Max Age and Forwarding Delay.
= Specifies the time interval in seconds between BPDU (Bridge
Protocol Data Units) configuration message generations by the root switch.
Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 285
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide maximum-age <6-40> = Specifies the maximum time (in seconds) a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure. All switch ports (except for designated ports) should receive
BPDUs at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STP information (provided in the last BPDU) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network. forward-delay <4-
30>
<port-list> pathcost <1-65535>
= Specifies the maximum time (in seconds) a switch will wait before changing states. This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.
= Enables STP on the specified ports.
<port-list> priority <0-255>
Specifies the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port. It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge.
= Specifies the priority for each port.
<port-list> treeIndex <1-2>
Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch. Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first.
= Specifies which STP configuration these ports will participate in. ( mrstp command only).
An example using spanning-tree command is shown next.
• Enable STP on the switch.
• Set the bridge priority of the switch to 0.
• Set the Hello Time to 4, Maximum Age to 20 and Forward Delay to 15 on the switch.
• Enable STP on port 5 with a path cost of 150.
• Set the priority for port 5 to 20.
sysname(config)# spanning-tree priority 0 sysname(config)# spanning-tree hello-time 4 maximum-age 20 forward-delay
15 sysname(config)# spanning-tree 5 path-cost 150 sysname(config)# spanning-tree 5 priority 20
286 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
36.4 no Command Examples
These are the commonly used command examples that belong to the no group of commands.
The no group commands are commands which are preceded by keyword no . This command negates the intended action of the command. In most cases the no command disables, resets or clears settings. There are cases, however, where the no command can activate features. This section shows some uses of these commands.
36.4.1 Disable Commands
Use the no command to disable features on the switch.
Syntax: no spanning-tree no mirror-port
Disables STP on the switch.
Disables port mirroring on the switch.
36.4.2 Resetting Commands
Use the no command to reset switch settings to their default values.
Syntax: no https timeout
Resets the https session timeout to default.
An example is shown next. The session timeout is reset to 300 seconds.
sysname(config)# no https timeout
Cache timeout 300
36.4.3 Re-enable commands
The no command can also be used to re-enable features which have been disabled.
Syntax: no ip route <ip> <mask> inactive
Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 287
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide where
<ip> <mask> inactive = Re-enables an ip route with the specified IP address and subnet mask.
An example is shown next.
• Enable the IP route with the IP address of 192.168.11.1 and subnet mask of
255.255.255.0. This ip route must have already been created and made inactive prior to re-enable command being applied. sysname(config)# no ip route 192.168.11.1 255.255.255.0 inactive
36.4.4 Other Examples of no Commands
In some cases the no command can disable a feature, disable an option of a feature or disable a feature on a port by port basis.
36.4.4.1 no trunk
Syntax: no trunk <T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|T6> no trunk <T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|T6> lacp no trunk <T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|T6> interface <port-list> where
<T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|T6>
<T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|T6> lacp
<T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|T6> interface <port-list>
= Disables the trunk group.
= Disables LACP in the trunk group.
= Removes ports from the trunk group.
An example is shown next.
• Disable trunk one (T1).
• Disable LAPC on trunk three (T3).
• Remove ports one, three, four and five from trunk two (T2). sysname(config)# no trunk T1 sysname(config)# no trunk T3 lacp sysname(config)# no trunk T2 interface 1,3-5
288 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
36.4.4.2 no port-access-authenticator
Syntax: no port-access-authenticator no port-access-authenticator <port-list> reauthenticate no port-access-authenticator <port-list> where
<port-list> reauthenticate
<port-list>
= Disables port authentication on the switch.
= Disables the re-authentication mechanism on the listed port(s).
= Disables authentication on the listed ports.
An example is shown next.
• Disable authentication on the switch.
• Disable re-authentication on ports one, three, four and five.
• Disable authentication on ports one, six and seven.
Figure 127 no port-access-authenticator Command Example sysname(config)# no port-access-authenticator sysname(config)# no port-access-authenticator 1,3-5 reauthenticate sysname(config)# no port-access-authenticator 1,6-7
36.4.4.3 no ssh
Syntax: no ssh key <rsa1|rsa|dsa> no ssh known-hosts <host-ip> no ssh known-hosts <host-ip> [1024|ssh-rsa|ssh-dsa] where key <rsa1|rsa|dsa> = Disables the secure shell server encryption key. Your switch supports SSH versions 1 and 2 using RSA and DSA authentication.
known-hosts <host-ip> = Removes a specific remote host from the list of all known hosts.
known-hosts <host-ip>
[1024|ssh-rsa|ssh-dsa]
= Removes remote known hosts with a specified public key type (1024-bit RSA1, RSA or DSA).
An example is shown next.
Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 289
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
• Disable the secure shell RSA1 encryption key.
• Remove the remote host with IP address 172.165.1.8 from the list of known hosts.
• Remove the remote host with IP address 172.165.1.9 and with an SSH-RSA encryption key from the list of known hosts. sysname(config)# no ssh key rsa1 sysname(config)# no ssh known-hosts 172.165.1.8
sysname(config)# no ssh known-hosts 172.165.1.9 ssh-rsa
36.5 Queuing Method Commands
You can use the queuing method commands to configure queuing for outgoing traffic on the switch. You can only select one queuing method for the switch.
Syntax: spq wfq wrr wrr fe-spq <Q0-Q7> where spq wfq wrr wrr fe-spq <Q0-Q7>
= Sets the queuing method to SPQ (Strictly Priority Queuing).
= Sets the queuing method to WFQ (Weighted Fair Queuing).
= Sets the queuing method to WRR (Weighted Round Robin).
= Sets the switch to use SPQ to service the subsequent queue(s) after and including the specified queue.
You may want to configure weights for specific queues on the ports if you use WRR. See the weight command example in
.
An example is shown next.
• Set the queueing method to SPQ.
sysname(config)# spq
36.6 Static Route Commands
You can create and configure static routes on the switch by using the ip route command.
290 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Syntax: ip route <ip> <mask> <next-hop-ip> ip route <ip> <mask> <next-hop-ip> [metric <metric>][name <name>]
[inactive] where
<ip>
<mask>
<next-hop-ip>
[metric <metric>]
[name <name>]
[inactive]
= Specifies the network IP address of the final destination.
= Specifies the subnet mask of this destination.
= Specifies the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your switch that will forward the packet to the destination. The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your switch.
= The metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks.
Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and
15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.
= Specifies a descriptive name (up to 32 printable ASCII characters) for identification purposes.
= Deactivates a static route
An example is shown next.
• Create a static route with the destination IP address of 172.21.1.104, subnet mask of
255.255.0.0 and the gateway IP address of 192.168.1.2.
• Assigns a metric value of 2 to the static route.
• Assigns the name “route1” to the static route. sysname(config)# ip route 172.21.1.104 255.255.0.0 192.168.1.2
sysname(config)# ip route 172.21.1.104 255.255.0.0 192.168.1.2 metric 2 sysname(config)# ip route 172.21.1.104 255.255.0.0 192.168.1.2 name route1
36.7 Enabling MAC Filtering
You can create a filter to drop packets based on the MAC address of the source or the destination.
Syntax: mac-filter name <name> mac <mac-addr> vlan <vlan-id> drop <src/dst/both>
Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 291
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide where name <name> mac <mac-addr> vlan <vlan-id> drop <src/dst/both>
= Names the filtering rule.
= Specifies the MAC address you want to filter.
= Specifies which VLAN this rule applies to.
= Selects the behavior of the rule.
• src - drop packets coming from the specified
MAC address
• dst- drop packets going to the specified MAC address
• both - drop packets coming from or going to the specified MAC address
An example is shown next.
• Create a filtering rule called “filter1”.
• Drop packets coming from and going to MAC address 00:12:00:12:00:12 on VLAN. sysname(config)# mac-filter name filter 1 sysname(config)# mac-filter name filter 1 mac 00:12:00:12:00:12 vlan 1 drop both
36.8 Enabling Trunking
To create and enable a trunk, enter trunk followed by the ports which you want to group and press [ENTER] .
Syntax: trunk <T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|T6> trunk <T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|T6> interface <port-list> trunk <T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|T6> lacp where
<T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|T6>
<T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|T6> interface <port-list>
<T1|T2|T3|T4|T5|T6> lacp
= Enables the trunk.
= Places ports in the trunk.
= Enables LACP in the trunk.
An example is shown next.
292 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
• Create trunk 1 on the switch.
• Place ports 5-8 in trunk 1.
• Enable dynamic link aggregation (LACP) on trunk 1. sysname(config)# trunk t1 sysname(config)# trunk t1 interface 5-8 sysname(config)# trunk t1 lacp
36.9 Enabling Port Authentication
To enable a port authentication, you need to specify your RADIUS server details and select the ports which require external authentication. You can set up multiple RADIUS servers and specify how the switch will process authentication requests.
36.9.1 RADIUS Server Settings
Configuring multiple RADIUS servers is only available via the command interpreter mode.
Use the radius-server command to set up your RADIUS server settings.
Syntax: radius-server host <index> <ip> radius-server host <index> <ip> [acct-port <socket-number>] [key <keystring>] radius-server timeout <1-1000> radius-server mode <priority|round-robin> where radius-server host <index>
<ip>
[acct-port <socket-number>]
= Specifies the IP address of the RADIUS server.
[key <key-string>]
= Changes the UDP port of the RADIUS server from the default (1812).
= Specifies a password (up to 32 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the
RADIUS server and the switch.
Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 293
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide radius-server timeout <1-
1000> mode <priority|round-robin>
= Specifies the timeout period (in seconds) the switch will wait for a response from a RADIUS server. If 2
RADIUS servers are configured, this is the total time the switch will wait for a response from either server.
= Specifies the way the switch will process requests from the clients to the RADIUS server. (Only applicable with multiple RADIUS servers configured.) priority - When a client sends an authentication request through the switch to the RADIUS server.
The switch will forward the request to the RADIUS server. If no response within half the timeout period, it will forward the request to the second RADIUS server.
round-robin - When a client sends an authentication request through the switch to the
RADIUS server. The switch will forward the request to the first RADIUS server. If there is no response within the timeout period, the request times out. The client sends an authentication request again and the switch forwards the request to the second RADIUS server.
See
for an example.
36.9.2 Port Authentication Settings
Use the port-access-authenticator command to configure port security on the switch.
Syntax: port-access-authenticator port-access-authenticator <port-list> port-access-authenticator <port-list> reauthenticate port-access-authenticator <port-list> reauth-period <reauth-period> where port-access-authenticator port-access-authenticator
<port-list> reauthenticate reauth-period <reauthperiod>
= Enables port authentication on the switch.
= Specifies which ports require authentication.
= Enables reauthentication on the port.
= Specifies how often a client has to re-enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port.
294 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
An example is shown next.
• Specify RADIUS server 1 with IP address 10.10.10.1, port 1890 and the string secretKey as the password. See
Section 36.9.1 on page 293 for more information on RADIUS server
commands.
• Specify the timeout period of 30 seconds that the switch will wait for a response from the
RADIUS server.
• Enable port authentication on ports 4 to 8.
• Activate reauthentication on the ports.
• Specify 1800 seconds as the interval for client reauthentication. sysname(config)# radius-server host 1 10.10.10.1 acct-port 1890 key secretKey sysname(config)# radius-server timeout 30 sysname(config)# port-access-authenticator sysname(config)# port-access-authenticator 4-8 sysname(config)# port-access-authenticator 4-8 reauthenticate sysname(config)# port-access-authenticator 4-8 reauth-period 1800
Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands 295
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
296 Chapter 36 Configuration Mode Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 37
Interface Commands
These are some commonly used configuration commands that belong to the interface group of commands.
37.1 Overview
The interface commands allow you to configure the switch on a port by port basis.
37.2 Interface Command Examples
This section provides examples of some frequently used interface commands.
37.2.1 interface port-channel
Use this command to enable the specified ports for configuration. Indicate multiple, nonsequential ports separated by a comma. Use a dash to specify a port range.
Syntax: interface port-channel <port-list>
An example is shown next.
• Enter the configuration mode.
• Enable ports 1, 3, 4 and 5 for configuration.
• Begin configuring for those ports.
sysname# config sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)#
37.2.2 bpdu-control
Syntax: bpdu-control <peer|tunnel|discard|network>
Chapter 37 Interface Commands 297
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide where
<peer|tunnel|discard| network>
= Type peer to process any BPDUs received on these ports.
Type tunnel to forward BPDUs received on these ports.
Type discard to drop any BPDUs received on these ports.
Type network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU.
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports 1, 3, 4 and 5 for configuration.
• Set the BPDU control to tunnel , to forward BPDUs received on ports one, three, four and five.
sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# bpdu-control tunnel sysname(config-interface)#
37.2.3 broadcast-limit
Syntax: broadcast-limit broadcast-limit <pkt/s> where
<pkt/s>
= Enables broadcast storm control limit on the switch.
= Limits how many broadcast packet the interface receives per second.
An example is shown next.
• Enable port one for configuration.
• Enable broadcast control.
• Set how many broadband packets the interface receives per second.
sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1 sysname(config-interface)# broadcast-limit sysname(config-interface)# broadcast-limit 21
37.2.4 bandwidth-limit
The bandwidth-limit command enables bandwidth control on the switch.
298 Chapter 37 Interface Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Syntax: bandwidth-limit bandwidth-limit pir <Kbps> bandwidth-limit cir <Kbps> bandwidth-limit egress <Kbps> where pir <Kbps> cir <Kbps> egress <Kbps>
= Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic.
= Sets the guaranteed bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic.
= Sets the maximum bandwidth allowed for outgoing traffic
( egress ) on the switch.
An example is shown next.
• Enable port one for configuration.
• Enable bandwidth control.
• Set the outgoing traffic bandwidth limit to 5000Kbps.
• Set the guaranteed bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic to 4000Kbps.
• Set the maximum bandwidth allowed for incoming traffic to 8000Kbps. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1 sysname(config-interface)# bandwidth-limit sysname(config-interface)# bandwidth-limit egress 5000 sysname(config-interface)# bandwidth-limit cir 4000 sysname(config-interface)# bandwidth-limit pir 8000
37.2.5 mirror
The mirror command enables port mirroring on the interface.
Syntax: mirror mirror dir <ingress|egress|both> where dir
<ingress|egress|both>
= Enables port mirroring for incoming, outgoing or both incoming and outgoing traffic.
Port mirroring copies traffic from one or all ports to another or all ports for external analysis.
An example is shown next.
Chapter 37 Interface Commands 299
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
• Enable port mirroring.
• Enable the monitor port 3.
• Enable ports 1, 4, 5 and 6 for configuration.
• Enable port mirroring on the ports.
• Enable port mirroring for outgoing traffic. Traffic is copied from ports 1, 4, 5 and 6 to port three in order to examine it in more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original ports. sysname(config)# mirror-port sysname(config)# mirror-port 3 sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,4-6 sysname(config-interface)# mirror sysname(config-interface)# mirror dir egress
37.2.6 gvrp
Syntax: gvrp
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network. Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local switch.
An example is shown next.
• Enable the IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN command to configure tagged VLAN for the switch.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Enable GVRP on the interface. sysname(config)# vlan1q gvrp sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# gvrp
37.2.7 ingress-check
The ingress-check command enables the device to discard incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member.
Syntax: ingress-check
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports 1, 3, 4 and 5 for configuration.
300 Chapter 37 Interface Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
• Enable ingress checking on the interface.
sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# ingress-check
37.2.8 frame-type
Syntax: frame-type <all|tagged|untagged> where
<all|tagged|u ntagged>
= Choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames, just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port.
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Enable ingress checking on the ports.
• Enable tagged frame-types on the interface. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# ingress-check sysname(config-interface)# frame-type tagged
37.2.9 weight
Syntax: weight <wt1> <wt2> ... <wt8> where
<wt1> <wt2> ...
<wt8>
= Sets the interface WFQ weighting. A weight value of one to eight is given to each variable from wt 1 to wt 8 .
An example is shown next.
• Enable WFQ queuing on the switch.
• Enable port 2 and ports 6 to 8 for configuration.
Chapter 37 Interface Commands 301
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
• Set the queue weights from Q0 to Q7. sysname# configure sysname(config)# wfq sysname(config)# interface port-channel 2,6-8 sysname(config-interface)# weight 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
37.2.10 egress set
Syntax: egress set <port-list> where
<port-list> = Sets the outgoing traffic port list for a port-based VLAN.
An example is shown next.
• Enable port-based VLAN tagging on the switch.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set the outgoing traffic ports as the CPU (0), seven (7) and eight (8). sysname(config)# vlan-type port-based sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# egress set 0,7,8
37.2.11 qos priority
Syntax: qos priority <0 .. 7> where
<0 .. 7> = Sets the quality of service priority for a port.
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set the IEEE 802.1p quality of service priority as four (4).
sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# qos priority 4
302 Chapter 37 Interface Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
37.2.12 name
Syntax: name <port-name-string> where
<port-name-string> = Sets a name for your port interface(s).
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set a name for the ports.
sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# name Test
37.2.13 speed-duplex
Syntax: speed-duplex <auto|10-half|10-full|100-half|100-full|1000-full> where
<auto|10-half|10full|100-half|100full|1000-full>
= Sets the duplex mode (half or full) and speed (10, 100 or 1000
Mbps) of the connection on the port. Selecting auto (autonegotiation) makes one port able to negotiate with a peer automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support.
An example is shown next.
• Enable ports one, three, four and five for configuration.
• Set the speed to 100 Mbps in half duplex mode. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 sysname(config-interface)# speed-duplex 100-half
37.2.14 test
You can perform an interface loopback test on specified ports. The test returns Passed! or
Failed!
Chapter 37 Interface Commands 303
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
An example is shown next.
• Select ports 3-6 for internal loopback test.
• Execute the test command.
• View the results. sysname(config)# interface port-channel 3-6 sysname(config-interface)# test 3-6
Testing internal loopback on port 3 :Passed!
Ethernet Port 3 Test ok.
Testing internal loopback on port 4 :Passed!
Ethernet Port 4 Test ok.
Testing internal loopback on port 5 :Passed!
Ethernet Port 5 Test ok.
Testing internal loopback on port 6 :Passed!
Ethernet Port 6 Test ok.
37.3 Interface no Command Examples
Similar to the no commands in the Enable and Config modes, the no commands for the
Interface sub mode also disable certain features. In this mode, however, this takes place on a port by port basis.
37.3.1 no bandwidth-limit
You can disable bandwidth limit on port 1 simply by placing the no command in front of the bandwidth-limit command.
Syntax: no bandwidth-limit
An example is shown next:
• Disable bandwidth limit on port1 sysname(config)# interface port-channel 1 sysname(config-interface)# no bandwidth-limit
304 Chapter 37 Interface Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 38
IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
Commands
This chapter describes the IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN and associated commands.
38.1 Configuring Tagged VLAN
The following procedure shows you how to configure tagged VLAN.
1 Use the IEEE 802.1Q tagged VLAN commands to configure tagged VLAN for the switch.
• Use the vlan <vlan-id> command to configure or create a VLAN on the switch. The switch automatically enters the config-vlan mode.Use the inactive command to deactivate the VLAN(s).
• Use the interface port-channel <port-list> command to enter the configinterface mode to set the VLAN settings on a port, then use the pvid <vlan-id> command to set the VLAN ID you created for the port-list to that specific port in the
PVID table.
• Use the exit command when you are finished configuring the VLAN. sysname (config)# vlan 2000 sysname (config-vlan)# name up1 sysname (config-vlan)# fixed 5-8 sysname (config-vlan)# no untagged 5-8 sysname (config-vlan)# exit sysname (config)# interface port-channel 5-8 sysname (config-interface)# pvid 2000 sysname (config-interface)# exit
2 Configure your management VLAN.
• Use the vlan <vlan-id> command to create a VLAN (VID 3 in this example) for managing the switch, and the switch will activate the new management VLAN.
• Use the inactive command to disable the new management VLAN.
sysname (config)# vlan 3 sysname (config-vlan)# inactive
Chapter 38 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 305
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
38.2 Global VLAN1Q Tagged VLAN Configuration Commands
This section shows you how to configure and monitor the IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN.
38.2.1 GARP Status
Syntax:
show garp
This command shows the switch’s GARP timer settings, including the join, leave and leave all timers.
An example is shown next.
sysname# show garp
GARP Timer
------------------------
Join Timer = 200
Leave Timer = 600
Leave All Timer = 10000 sysname#
38.2.2 GARP Timer
Syntax: garp join <msec> leave <msec> leaveall <msec> where join <msec> leave <msec>
= This sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a Join Period timer. The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 32767 milliseconds; the default is 200 milliseconds.
= This sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave Period timer. Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer; the default is 600 milliseconds.
leaveall
<msec>
= This sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds. Each port has a single Leave All Period timer. Leave All
Timer must be larger than Leave Timer; the default is 10000 milliseconds.
This command sets the switch’s GARP timer settings, including the join, leave and leave all timers.
306 Chapter 38 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Switches join VLANs by making a declaration. A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP. Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message. A Leave All message terminates all registrations. GARP timers set declaration timeout values.
The following example sets the Join Timer to 300 milliseconds, the Leave Timer to 800 milliseconds and the Leave All Timer to 11000 milliseconds.
sysname (config)# garp join 300 leave 800 leaveall 11000
38.2.3 GVRP Timer
Syntax: show vlan1q gvrp
This command shows the switch’s GVRP settings.
An example is shown next.
sysname# show vlan1q gvrp
GVRP Support
--------------------gvrpEnable = YES sysname #
38.2.4 Enable GVRP
Syntax:
vlan1q gvrp
This command turns on GVRP in order to propagate VLAN information beyond the switch.
38.2.5 Disable GVRP
Syntax:
no vlan1q gvrp
This command turns off GVRP so that the switch does not propagate VLAN information to other switches.
38.3 Port VLAN Commands
You must configure the switch port VLAN settings in config-interface mode.
Chapter 38 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 307
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
38.3.1 Set Port VID
Syntax: pvid <VID> where
<VID> = Specifies the VLAN number between 1 and 4094.
This command sets the default VLAN ID on the port(s).
The following example sets the default VID to 200 on ports 1 to 5. sysname (config)# interface port-channel 1-5 sysname (config-interface)# pvid 200
38.3.2 Set Acceptable Frame Type
Syntax: frame-type <all|tagged|untagged> where
<all|tagged| untagged>
= Specifies all Ethernet frames (tagged and untagged), only tagged
Ethernet frames or only untagged Ethernet frames.
This command sets the specified port to accept all Ethernet frames or only those with an IEEE
802.1Q VLAN tag.
The following example sets ports 1 to 5 to accept only tagged frames. sysname (config)# interface port-channel 1-5 sysname (config-interface)# frame-type tagged
38.3.3 Enable or Disable Port GVRP
Use the gvrp command to enable GVRP on the port(s). Use the no gvrp command to disable
GVRP.
The following example turns off GVRP for ports 1 to 5. sysname (config)# interface port-channel 1-5 sysname (config-interface)# no gvrp
308 Chapter 38 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
38.3.4 Modify Static VLAN
Use the following commands in the config-vlan mode to configure the static VLAN table.
Syntax: vlan <vlan-id> fixed <port-list> forbidden <port-list> name <name-str> normal <port-list> untagged <port-list> no fixed <port-list> no forbidden <port-list> no untagged <port-list> where
<vlan-id>
<name-str>
<port-list>
= The VLAN ID [1 – 4094].
= A name to identify the SVLAN entry.
= This is the switch port list.
• Enter fixed to register the <port-list> to the static VLAN table with <vlan-id> .
• Enter normal to confirm registration of the <port-list> to the static VLAN table with
<vlan-id> .
• Enter forbidden to block a <port-list> from joining the static VLAN table with
<vlan-id> .
• Enter no fixed or no forbidden to change <port-list> to normal status.
• Enter untagged to send outgoing frames without a tag.
• Enter no untagged to tag outgoing frames.
38.3.4.1 Modify a Static VLAN Table Example
The following example configures ports 1 to 5 as fixed and untagged ports in VLAN 2000. sysname (config)# vlan 2000 sysname (config-vlan)# fixed 1-5 sysname (config-vlan)# untagged 1-5
38.3.4.2 Forwarding Process Example
38.3.4.2.1 Tagged Frames
1 First the switch checks the VLAN ID (VID) of tagged frames or assigns temporary VIDs to untagged frames.
2 The switch then checks the VID in a frame’s tag against the SVLAN table.
Chapter 38 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 309
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
3 The switch notes what the SVLAN table says (that is, the SVLAN tells the switch whether or not to forward a frame and if the forwarded frames should have tags).
4 Then the switch applies the port filter to finish the forwarding decision. This means that frames may be dropped even if the SVLAN says to forward them. Frames might also be dropped if they are sent to a CPE (customer premises equipment) DSL device that does not accept tagged frames.
38.3.4.2.2 Untagged Frames
1 An untagged frame comes in from the LAN.
2 The switch checks the PVID table and assigns a temporary VID of 1.
3 The switch ignores the port from which the frame came, because the switch does not send a frame to the port from which it came. The switch also does not forward frames to
“forbidden” ports.
4 If after looking at the SVLAN, the switch does not have any ports to which it will send the frame, it won’t check the port filter.
38.3.5 Delete VLAN ID
Syntax: no vlan <vlan-id> where
<vlan-id> = The VLAN ID [1 – 4094].
This command deletes the specified VLAN ID entry from the static VLAN table. The following example deletes entry 2 in the static VLAN table. sysname (config)# no vlan 2
38.4 Enable VLAN
Syntax: vlan <vlan-id>
This command enables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN (Static VLAN) table.
310 Chapter 38 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
38.5 Disable VLAN
Syntax: vlan <vlan-id> inactive
This command disables the specified VLAN ID in the SVLAN (Static VLAN) table.
38.6 Show VLAN Setting
Syntax: show vlan
This command shows the IEEE 802.1Q Tagged SVLAN (Static VLAN) table.
An example is shown next.
• VID is the VLAN identification number.
• Status shows whether the VLAN is static or active.
• Elap-Time is the time since the VLAN was created on the switch.
• The TagCtl section of the last column shows which ports are tagged and which are untagged. sysname# show vlan
The Number of VLAN: 3
Idx. VID Status Elap-Time TagCtl
---- ---- -------- ------------ ------------------------
1 1 Static 0:12:13 Untagged :1-2
Tagged :
1 100 Static 0:00:17 Untagged :
Tagged :1-4
1 200 Static 0:00:07 Untagged :1-2
Tagged :3-8
Chapter 38 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands 311
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
312 Chapter 38 IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 39
Multicast VLAN Registration
Commands
This chapter shows you how to use Multicast VLAN Registration (mvr) commands.
39.1 Overview
Use the mvr commands in the configuration mode to create and configure multicast VLANs.
Note: If you want to enable IGMP snooping see
.
39.2 Create Multicast VLAN
Use the following commands in the config-mvr mode to configure a multicast VLAN group.
Syntax: mvr <vlan-id> mvr <vlan-id> source-port <port-list> mvr <vlan-id> receiver-port <port-list> mvr <vlan-id> inactive mvr <vlan-id> mode <dynamic|compatible> mvr <vlan-id> name <name-str> mvr <vlan-id> tagged <port-list> mvr <vlan-id> group <name-str> start-address <ip> end-address <ip> mvr <vlan-id> exit where
<vlan-id> source-port
<port-list> receiver-port
<port-list>
= The VLAN ID [1 – 4094].
= Specifies the MVR source ports which send and receive multicast traffic.
= Specifies the MVR receiving ports which only receive multicast traffic. name <name-str> = A name to identify the multicast VLAN group.
mode
<dynamic|compati ble>
= Specifies dynamic (sends IGMP reports to all source ports in the multicast VLAN) or compatible (does not send IGMP reports).
Chapter 39 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands 313
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide group name
<name-str> start-address
<ip>
= A name to identify the MVR IP multicast group.
= Specifies the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation. end-address <ip> = Specifies the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation. Enter the same IP address as the startaddress if you want to configure only one IP address for the multicast group.
• Enter MVR mode. Create a multicast VLAN with the name multiVlan and the VLAN
ID of 3.
• Specify source ports 2, 3, 5 and receiver ports 6-8.
• Specify dynamic mode for the multicast group.
• Configure MVR multicast group addresses by the name of ipgroup .
• Exit MVR mode.
See the following example. sysname(config)# mvr 3 name multivlan sysname(config-mvr)# source-port 2,3,5 receiver-port 6-8 sysname(config-mvr)# mode dynamic sysname(config-mvr)# group ipgroup start-address 224.0.0.1 end-address
224.0.0.255
sysname(config-mvr)# exit
314 Chapter 39 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 40
Troubleshooting
This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies.
40.1 Problems Starting Up the Switch
Table 90 Troubleshooting the Start-Up of Your Switch
PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION
None of the LEDs turn on when you turn on the switch.
Check the power connection and make sure the power source is turned on.
If the error persists, you may have a hardware problem. In this case, you should contact your vendor.
40.2 Problems Accessing the Switch
Table 91 Troubleshooting Accessing the Switch
PROBLEM
I cannot access the switch using
Telnet.
I cannot access the web configurator.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Make sure the ports are properly connected.
You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions. Close other Telnet session(s) or try connecting again later.
Check that you have enabled Telnet service access. If you have configured a secured client IP address, your computer’s IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on access control for details.
The administrator username is “admin”. The default administrator password is “1234”.
The username and password are case-sensitive. Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing. If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it, you will need to upload the default configuration file. This restores all of the factory defaults including the password.
Check that you have enabled web service access. If you have configured a secured client IP address, your computer’s IP address must match it. Refer to the chapter on access control for details.
Your computer’s and the switch’s IP addresses must be on the same subnet.
See the following section to check that pop-up windows, JavaScripts and Java permissions are allowed.
Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 315
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
40.2.1 Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary.
40.2.1.1 Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP address.
40.2.1.1.1 Disable pop-up Blockers
1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools , Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up
Blocker .
Figure 128 Pop-up Blocker
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the
Privacy tab.
1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools , Internet Options , Privacy .
2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.
316 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting
Figure 129 Internet Options
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
3 Click Apply to save this setting.
40.2.1.1.2 Enable pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps.
1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools , Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
2 Select Settings… to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.
Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 317
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 130 Internet Options
3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.1.1.
4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites .
318 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting
Figure 131 Pop-up Blocker Settings
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.
6 Click Apply to save this setting.
40.2.1.2 JavaScripts
If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that
JavaScripts are allowed.
1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools , Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 319
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 132 Internet Options
2 Click the Custom Level...
button.
3 Scroll down to Scripting .
4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
6 Click OK to close the window.
320 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting
Figure 133 Security Settings - Java Scripting
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
40.2.1.3 Java Permissions
1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools , Internet Options and then the Security tab.
2 Click the Custom Level...
button.
3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM .
4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
5 Click OK to close the window.
Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 321
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Figure 134 Security Settings - Java
40.2.1.3.1 JAVA (Sun)
1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools , Internet Options and then the Advanced tab.
2 make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected.
3 Click OK to close the window.
322 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting
Figure 135 Java (Sun)
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
40.3 Problems with the Password
Table 92 Troubleshooting the Password
PROBLEM
Cannot access the switch.
CORRECTIVE ACTION
The password field is case sensitive. Make sure that you enter the correct password using the proper casing.
The administrator username is “admin”. The default administrator password is
“1234”. The username and password are case-sensitive. Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing. If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it, you will need to upload the default configuration file. This restores all of the factory defaults including the password.
Chapter 40 Troubleshooting 323
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
324 Chapter 40 Troubleshooting
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
A P P E N D I X A
Product Specifications
These are the switch product specifications.
Table 93 General Product Specifications
Ethernet
Interface
Fast Ethernet
SFP Interface
Gigabit
Interface
Bridging
Switching
STP
RSTP
QoS
Security
VLAN
24 10/100 Base-TX interfaces
Auto-negotiation
Auto-MDI/MDIX
Compliant with IEEE 802.3/3u
Back pressure flow control for half duplex
Flow control for full duplex (IEEE 802.3x)
IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet compliant (ES-3124PWR only)
RJ-45 Ethernet cable connector (ES-3124, ES-3124-4F and ES-3124PWR only)
24 100Base SFP slots (ES-3124F only)
Compliant with IEEE 802.3/3u
Back pressure flow control for half duplex
Flow control for full duplex (IEEE 802.3x)
2 Gigabit Ethernet / Mini-GBIC dual-personality interfaces.
2 Gigabit Ethernet ports (ES-3124 and ES-3124PWR only)
2 Mini-GBIC ports (ES-31234-4F and ES-3124F only)
16K MAC addresses
Static MAC address filtering (port lock)
Broadcast storm control
Limited maximum number of MAC addresses per port
Switching fabric: 13.6Gbps, non-blocking
Max. Frame size: 1522 bytes
Forwarding frame: IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q, Ethernet II, PPPoE
Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets
IEEE 802.1d spanning tree protocol
IEEE 802.1w, rapid reconfiguration to recover network failure
Up to 6 STP configurations
IEEE 802.1p
Eight priority queues
Supports RFC 2475 DiffServ, DSCP to IEEE 802.1p priority mapping
IEEE 802.1x port-based authentication
Static MAC Address Forward
Port-based VLAN setting
Tag-based (IEEE 802.1Q) VLAN
Number of VLAN: 4K (256 static VLANs)
Supports GVRP
Protocol based VLAN support
Appendix A 325
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 93 General Product Specifications (continued)
Link aggregation
Port mirroring
Bandwidth control
Supports IEEE 802.3ad; static and dynamic (LACP) port trunking
Up to six groups and each group can aggregate up to eight ports
All ports support port mirroring
Supports rate limiting at 64Kbps increment
Table 94 Management Specifications
System Control Alarm/Status surveillance
LED indication for alarm and system status
Performance monitoring
Line speed
Four RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms, and events)
Throughput monitoring
CMP packet transmission
Port mirroring and aggregation
Spanning Tree Protocol
IGMP snooping
Firmware upgrade and download through FTP/TFTP
Login authorization and security levels (read only and read/write)
Self diagnostics
FLASH memory
Network Management CLI through console port and telnet
Web-based management
Clustering: up to 24 switches can be managed by one IP
SNMP
RMON groups (history, statistics, alarms and events)
MIB RFC1213 MIB II
RFC1493 Bridge MIB
RFC1643 Ethernet MIB
RFC1757 Four groups of RMON
RFC2011 IP MIB·
RFC2012 TCP MIB
RFC2013 UDP MIB
RFC2674 Bridge MIB extension (for IEEE 802.1Q)
326
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 95 Physical and Environmental Specifications
LEDs Per switch: PWR, SYS, ALM, BPS
Per Ethernet port: LNK/ACT, PoE (ES-3124PWR only)
Per Ethernet port: LNK/ACT, FDX (ES-3124 and ES-3124-4F only)
Per Fast Ethernet SFP port: LNK/ACT (ES-3124F only)
Per Gigabit port: LNK/ACT, FDX
Per Mini-GBIC slot: LNK, ACT
Per management port: 10, 100
Dimension 438 mm (W) x 270 mm (D) x 44.5 mm (H) (ES-3124, ES-3124-4F and ES-3124F only)
438 mm (W) x 420 mm (D) x 44.45 mm (H) (ES-3124PWR only)
Standard 19” rack mountable
Device Weight 4 Kg (ES-3124F)
4.2 Kg (ES-3124 and ES-3124-4F)
6.8 Kg (ES-3124PWR)
Temperature Operating: 0º C ~ 45º C
Storage: -10º C ~ 70º C
Humidity
Power Supply
10 ~ 90% (non-condensing)
Overload protection
AC version
ES-3124: 100 ~ 240 V, 60 W, 1.5 A max.
ES-3124-4F: 100 ~ 240 V, 60 W, 1.5 A max.
ES-3124F: 100~ 240 V, 58 W, 1.5 A max.
ES-3124PWR: 100 ~ 240 V, 600 W, 10 A max.
DC version
ES-3124: -48V~ -60 V, 48 W max., 1.5 A max.
ES-3124-4F: -48V~ -60 V, 48 W max., 1.5 A max.
ES-3124F: -48~ -60 V , 48 W, 1.5 A max.
DC input rating no tolerance
Safety
EMC
ANS/UL 60950-1
CSA 60950-1
EN 60950-1
IEC 60950-1
FCC Part 15 (Class A)
CE EMC (Class A)
Appendix A 327
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
328
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
A P P E N D I X B
IP Addresses and Subnetting
This appendix introduces IP addresses, IP address classes and subnet masks. You use subnet masks to subdivide a network into smaller logical networks.
Introduction to IP Addresses
An IP address has two parts: the network number and the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID identifies a single device on the network.
An IP address is made up of four octets, written in dotted decimal notation, for example,
192.168.1.1. (An octet is an 8-digit binary number. Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in decimal.)
There are several classes of IP addresses. The first network number (192 in the above example) defines the class of IP address. These are defined as follows:
• Class A: 0 to 127
• Class B: 128 to 191
• Class C: 192 to 223
• Class D: 224 to 239
• Class E: 240 to 255
IP Address Classes and Hosts
The class of an IP address determines the number of hosts you can have on your network.
• In a class A address the first octet is the network number, and the remaining three octets are the host ID.
• In a class B address the first two octets make up the network number, and the two remaining octets make up the host ID.
• In a class C address the first three octets make up the network number, and the last octet is the host ID.
329
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table shows the network number and host ID arrangement for classes A, B and
C.
Table 96 Classes of IP Addresses
IP ADDRESS
Class A
Class B
Class C
OCTET 1 OCTET 2 OCTET 3
Network number Host ID Host ID
Network number Network number Host ID
Network number Network number Network number
OCTET 4
Host ID
Host ID
Host ID
An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network
(192.168.1.255 for example). Therefore, to determine the total number of hosts allowed in a network, deduct two as shown next:
• A class C address (1 host octet: 8 host bits) can have 2 8 – 2, or 254 hosts.
• A class B address (2 host octets: 16 host bits) can have 2 16 – 2, or 65534 hosts.
A class A address (3 host octets: 24 host bits) can have 2 24 – 2 hosts, or approximately 16 million hosts.
IP Address Classes and Network ID
The value of the first octet of an IP address determines the class of an address.
• Class A addresses have a 0 in the leftmost bit.
• Class B addresses have a 1 in the leftmost bit and a 0 in the next leftmost bit.
• Class C addresses start with 1 1 0 in the first three leftmost bits.
• Class D addresses begin with 1 1 1 0 . Class D addresses are used for multicasting, which is used to send information to groups of computers.
• There is also a class E. It is reserved for future use.
The following table shows the allowed ranges for the first octet of each class. This range determines the number of subnets you can have in a network.
Table 97 Allowed IP Address Range By Class
CLASS
Class A
Class B
Class C
Class D
Class E
(reserved)
ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET (BINARY)
0 0000000 to 0 1111111
10 000000 to 10 111111
110 00000 to 110 11111
1110 0000 to 1110 1111
1111 0000 to 1111 1111
ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST
OCTET (DECIMAL)
0 to 127
128 to 191
192 to 223
224 to 239
240 to 255
330
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Subnet Masks
A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation).
A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the corresponding bit in the
IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID.
Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The “natural” masks for class A, B and C IP addresses are as follows.
Table 98 “Natural” Masks
CLASS
A
B
C
NATURAL MASK
255.0.0.0
255.255.0.0
255.255.255.0
Subnetting
With subnetting, the class arrangement of an IP address is ignored. For example, a class C address no longer has to have 24 bits of network number and 8 bits of host ID. With subnetting, some of the host ID bits are converted into network number bits.
By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of
32 bits.
Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/” followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address.
For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128.
The following table shows all possible subnet masks for a class “C” address using both notations.
Table 99 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation
SUBNET MASK
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.224
SUBNET MASK “1” BITS
/24
/25
/26
/27
LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
0000 0000
1000 0000
1100 0000
1110 0000
DECIMAL
0
128
192
224
331
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 99 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation (continued)
SUBNET MASK
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.252
SUBNET MASK “1” BITS
/28
/29
/30
LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
1111 0000
1111 1000
1111 1100
DECIMAL
240
248
252
The first mask shown is the class “C” natural mask. Normally if no mask is specified it is understood that the natural mask is being used.
Example: Two Subnets
As an example, you have a class “C” address 192.168.1.0 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
Table 100 Two Subnets Example
IP/SUBNET MASK
IP Address
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask
Subnet Mask (Binary)
NETWORK NUMBER
192.168.1.
11000000.10101000.00000001.
255.255.255.
11111111.11111111.11111111.
HOST ID
0
00000000
0
00000000
The first three octets of the address make up the network number (class “C”).
To make two networks, divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate subnets by converting one of the host ID bits of the IP address to a network number bit. The “borrowed” host ID bit can be either “0” or “1” thus giving two subnets; 192.168.1.0 with mask
255.255.255.128 and 192.168.1.128 with mask 255.255.255.128.
Note: In the following charts, shaded/bolded last octet bit values indicate host ID bits
“borrowed” to make network ID bits. The number of “borrowed” host ID bits determines the number of subnets you can have. The remaining number of host ID bits (after “borrowing”) determines the number of hosts you can have on each subnet.
Table 101 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK
IP Address
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask
Subnet Mask (Binary)
NETWORK NUMBER
192.168.1.
11000000.10101000.00000001.
255.255.255.
11111111.11111111.11111111.
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
0
0 0000000
128
1 0000000
332
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 101 Subnet 1 (continued)
IP/SUBNET MASK
Subnet Address: 192.168.1.0
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127
NETWORK NUMBER
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126
Table 102 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK
IP Address
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255
NETWORK NUMBER
192.168.1.
11000000.10101000.00000001.
255.255.255.
11111111.11111111.11111111.
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
128
1 0000000
128
1 0000000
Host IDs of all zeros represent the subnet itself and host IDs of all ones are the broadcast address for that subnet, so the actual number of hosts available on each subnet in the example above is 2
7
– 2 or 126 hosts for each subnet.
192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is the subnet itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask
255.255.255.128 is the directed broadcast address for the first subnet. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for the first subnet is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly the host ID range for the second subnet is 192.168.1.129 to
192.168.1.254.
Example: Four Subnets
The above example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a class “C” address space into two subnets. Similarly to divide a class “C” address into four subnets, you need to
“borrow” two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits (11111111.11111111.11111111.
11 000000) or 255.255.255.192. Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 2
6
-2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the broadcast address on the subnet).
Table 103 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK
IP Address
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
NETWORK NUMBER
192.168.1.
11000000.10101000.00000001.
11111111.11111111.11111111.
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
0
00 000000
11 000000
333
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Table 103 Subnet 1 (continued)
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER
Subnet Address: 192.168.1.0
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62
Table 104 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER
IP Address
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Subnet Address: 192.168.1.64
192.168.1.
11000000.10101000.00000001.
11111111.11111111.11111111.
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65
Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.127
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126
Table 105 Subnet 3
IP/SUBNET MASK
IP Address
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191
Table 106 Subnet 4
IP/SUBNET MASK
IP Address
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255
NETWORK NUMBER
192.168.1.
11000000.10101000.00000001.
11111111.11111111.11111111.
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190
NETWORK NUMBER
192.168.1.
11000000.10101000.00000001.
11111111.11111111.11111111.
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
64
01 000000
11 000000
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
128
10 000000
11 000000
LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
192
11 000000
11 000000
Example Eight Subnets
Similarly use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and
111).
334
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table shows class C IP address last octet values for each subnet.
Table 107 Eight Subnets
SUBNET
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS
128
160
192
224
0
32
64
96
1
33
65
97
129
161
193
225
LAST ADDRESS
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
158
190
222
254
30
62
94
126
159
191
223
255
31
63
95
127
The following table is a summary for class “C” subnet planning.
Table 108 Class C Subnet Planning
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
NO. “BORROWED” HOST
BITS
SUBNET MASK
255.255.255.128 (/25)
255.255.255.192 (/26)
255.255.255.224 (/27)
255.255.255.240 (/28)
255.255.255.248 (/29)
255.255.255.252 (/30)
255.255.255.254 (/31)
NO. SUBNETS
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
6
2
1
126
62
30
14
Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks.
For class “A” and class “B” addresses the subnet mask also determines which bits are part of the network number and which are part of the host ID.
A class “B” address has two host ID octets available for subnetting and a class “A” address has three host ID octets (see
) available for subnetting.
335
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
The following table is a summary for class “B” subnet planning.
Table 109 Class B Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED” HOST
BITS
SUBNET MASK
13
14
15
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
255.255.128.0 (/17)
255.255.192.0 (/18)
255.255.224.0 (/19)
255.255.240.0 (/20)
255.255.248.0 (/21)
255.255.252.0 (/22)
255.255.254.0 (/23)
255.255.255.0 (/24)
255.255.255.128 (/25)
255.255.255.192 (/26)
255.255.255.224 (/27)
255.255.255.240 (/28)
255.255.255.248 (/29)
255.255.255.252 (/30)
255.255.255.254 (/31)
NO. SUBNETS
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
32
64
128
256
2
4
8
16
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
6
2
1
126
62
30
14
32766
16382
8190
4094
2046
1022
510
254
336
Symbols
“standby” ports
Numerics
10/1000 Ethernet ports
802.1P priority
A access control limitation
login account
remote management
service port
SNMP
accounts and modes
address learning, MAC
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
administrator password
aggregation ID
aggregator ID
aging time
alternative subnet mask notation
applications
backbone
bridging
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
switched workgroup
ARP how it works
viewing
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol)
automatic VLAN registration
B back up, configuration file
Index
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Index
basic setting
BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units)
Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs)
C certifications
notices
viewing
CFI (Canonical Format Indicator)
changing password
CLI syntax conventions
cloning a port See port cloning
cluster management
and switch passwords
cluster manager
cluster member
cluster member firmware upgrade
network example
setup
specification
status
switch models
VID
web configurator
cluster manager
cluster member
Command Line Interface accessing
introduction
Command Line Interface (CLI)
commands
accessing
and configuration file
and interfaces
and multicasting
and passwords
configuration mode details
configure tagged VLAN example
enable mode details
exit
forwarding process example
getting help
logging in
modes
modes summary
337
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide mvr mode details
static VLAN table example
summary
syntax conventions
user mode details
using history
vlan mode details
commands interface mode details
configuration change running config
saving
configuration file
and commands
backup
restore
configuration, saving
connections hardware
Console port
console port commands
settings
,
contact information
copying port settings See port cloning
copyright
CPU management port
CRC (Cyclic Redundant Check)
current date
current time
customer support
D
DHCP
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
DHCP relay
DHCP relay agent information
diagnostics
Ethernet port test
ping
system log
disclaimer
Double-tagged Frames
,
DSCP and IEEE 802.1p values
configuration
mapping priority
packet priority
DSCP (DiffServ Code Point)
dual personality interfaces
338 dynamic link aggregation
E egress port
Ethernet broadcast address
Ethernet port test
Ethernet ports
default settings
extended authentication protocol
external authentication server
F
FCC interference statement
file transfer using FTP command example
filename convention, configuration
filtering
rules
filtering database, MAC table
firmware upgrade
,
viewing
firmware, version
flow control
back pressure
IEEE802.3x
frames tagged
untagged
front panel
FTP
file transfer procedure
restrictions over WAN
G
GARP
GARP (Generic Attribute Registration Protocol)
garp status
GARP status command
GARP terminology
GARP timer
GBIC ports
GBIC, ports
Index
general setup
getting help
GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
GVRP
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol)
gvrp disable
gvrp enable
gvrp status
H hardware
connections console port
front panel
installation precautions
mounting brackets
overview
rack-mounting
transceivers
hardware installation
help
in command interpreter
web configurator
history in command interpreter
HTTPS
certificates
implementation
public keys, private keys
HTTPS example
I
IEEE 802.1p, priority
IEEE 802.1x
activate
reauthentication
IEEE 802.1x, port authentication
IGMP version
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol)
IGMP filtering
profile
profiles
IGMP snooping
MVR
ingress port
installation
Index freestanding
mounting brackets
precautions
rack-mounting
rubber feet
interfaces
IP
IP interface
IP setup
iStacking
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
L
LACP
system priority
timeout
LEDs
lights
limit MAC address learning
Link Aggregate Control Protocol (LACP)
link aggregation
dynamic
ID information
setup
status
link aggregation See also trunking
lockout
log
login
password
web configurator
login account
Administrator
non-administrator
login accounts
configuring via web configurator
multiple
number of
login password
M
MAC (Media Access Control)
MAC address
maximum number per port
MAC address learning
specify limit
MAC table
how it works
339
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide viewing
maintenance
current configuration
main screen
port
Management Information Base (MIB)
management interface, See also CLI
management port
MIB and SNMP
supported MIBs
MIB (Management Information Base)
mini GBIC ports
connection speed
connector types
transceiver installation
transceiver removal
mirroring ports
modes and accounts
in command interpreter
mounting brackets
MSA (MultiSource Agreement)
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit)
multicast
multicast group
multicast settings
multicast VLAN
multicasting
802.1 priority
addresses
setup
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
Multiple STP
MVR
configuration
configuration example
group configuration
how it works
modes
network example
ports
MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)
N network management system (NMS)
NTP (RFC-1305)
340
P password
changing
ping, test connection
port authentication
IEEE802.1x
RADIUS server
port based VLAN type
port cloning
advanced settings
basic settings
port details
port isolation
Port Mirroring
port mirroring
and commands
port redundancy
port security
limit MAC address learning
port setup
port status
Port VID
Default for all ports
port VLAN trunking
port-based VLAN
all connected
port isolation
settings wizard
ports
“standby”
and MVR
diagnostics
GBIC
mirroring
speed/duplex
priority level
priority, queue assignment
product registration
Product specification
protocol based VLAN
and IEEE 802.1Q tagging
example
hexadecimal notation for protocols
isolate traffic
priority
PVID
PVID (Priority Frame)
Index
Q queue weight
queuing
SPQ
WFQ
WRR
queuing algorithm
queuing method
R rack-mounting
RADIUS
advantages
network example
server
settings
RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service)
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). See STP
reboot load configuration
reboot system
registration product
Related Documentation
remote management
service
trusted computers
reset
resetting
to factory default settings
resetting the switch
restore configuration
restoring configuration
RFC 3164
RFC 3580
Round Robin Scheduling
RSTP
See also Spanning Tree Protocol
RSTP (Rapid STP)
rubber feet installation hardware
rubber feet
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
S safety warnings
saving configuration
service access control
service port
Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier
Service Provider’s Network
Simple Network Management Protocol, See SNMP
SNMP
agent
and MIB
communities
management model
manager
MIB
network components
object variables
protocol operations
setup
traps
versions supported
SNMP traps
SP TPID
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
SPQ (Strict Priority Queuing)
SSH encryption methods
how it works
implementation
SSH (Secure Shell)
SSL (Secure Socket Layer)
standby ports
static MAC address
static MAC forwarding
,
static routes
cost of transmission
TCP/IP parameters
static VLAN
control
tagging
status
LED
link aggregation
port
port details
STP
VLAN
status lights
status screen
STP
bridge ID
bridge priority
Index 341
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide configuration
designated bridge
forwarding delay
,
Hello BPDU
Hello Time
how it works
Max Age
path cost
,
,
port priority
port state
root port
status
,
terminology
STP (Spanning Tree Protocol)
subnet
subnet mask
subnetting
switch lockout
switch reset
switch setup
sys commands examples
sys log disp
sys sw mac list
syslog
protocol
server setup
settings
setup
severity levels
system information
system log
system login
system reboot
T tagged VLAN
Telnet commands
logging in
management
time current
time server
time zone
Time (RFC-868)
time server
time service protocol
time format
time zone
342 trademarks
transceiver installation
removal
traps destination
traps, SNMP
trunk group
trunking
tunnel protocol attribute
U
UTC (Universal Time Coordinated)
V
Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA
ventilation
ventilation holes hardware
VID
number of possible VIDs
priority frame
VID (VLAN Identifier)
VLAN
acceptable frame type
automatic registration
ID
ingress filtering
introduction
number of VLANs
port isolation
port number
port settings
port-based VLAN
static VLAN
status
,
tagged
trunking
type
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network)
VLAN Stacking
VLAN trunking
VLAN, protocol based, See protocol based VLAN
vlan1q port accept
vlan1q port gvrp
vlan1q svlan active
vlan1q svlan delentry
Index
vlan1q svlan inactive
vlan1q svlan list
vlan1q svlan setentry
VSA
W warning lights
warranty
note
web configurator getting help
help
home
logging out
login
navigation panel
screen summary
weight, queuing
Weighted Round Robin Scheduling (WRR)
WFQ (Weighted Fair Scheduling)
WRR (Weighted Round Robin Scheduling
Z
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System)
ES-3124 Series User’s Guide
Index 343
advertisement
Key Features
- Managed
- Quality of Service (QoS) support
- Basic switching RJ-45 Ethernet ports quantity: 1 Console port: RS-232
- 100 - 240 V Power over Ethernet (PoE)
Related manuals
advertisement